#Not just because it fits her physical position by the king's side much better
Explore tagged Tumblr posts
Text
"Alice Perrers was perceived by her contemporaries to be an uncrowned queen and through an analysis of her activities it is clear she was able to utilise the practical benefits of queenship for her own ends. However, by taking on the mantle of queenship Alice fundamentally corrupted the sovereignty and kingship of Edward III. First, by her aggressively political behaviour she became the threat at the heart of the power structure that the gendered constructions of queenship were supposed to remove from a consort. Second, by taking on the practical aspects of queenship she inherently undermined the ideological role of queenship, both by the simple fact that she was a mistress and not a queen, and even more so because of her behaviour. The problems Alice caused and how she was perceived were amplified in contrast to the [...] demeanour of Philippa, who was widely respected and much loved by the people. Just as queens in their exalted position were âlightning rodsâ for ideas about women and female power, so was Alice because of her proximity to the king."
â Laura Tompkins, The uncrowned queen: Alice Perrers, Edward III and political crisis in fourteenth-century England, 1360-1377 (Thesis, University of St Andrews, 2013)
"Alice's expansion of her power through the office of queenship was problematic for a number of reasons. First, while the queenâs power was legitimised by her marriage to the king and her coronation, Aliceâs power was not formalised in this way and consequently would have been regarded as illegitimate. Second, she was not the right type of woman to share in the kingâs dignity. She was not noble, she was not chaste and she was not virtuous. Instead, she was a low-born London widow and a businesswoman. Consequently, we find Alice being discussed in the language and stereotypes of queenship, but in a rather negative light. For example, while queens are routinely described as noble, beautiful and virtuous regardless of what they actually looked like, Walsingham is quick to emphasise that Alice was of low birth, and that, almost implied as a consequence, she âwas not attractive or beautifulâ. While we do not know what Alice looked like it seems unlikely that Edward III would have taken and kept her as a mistress for so long if she had been physically repellent. Third, and most significantly, not only was Alice an inappropriate mistress exercising illegitimate power, but she also broke all of the gendered rules that queenship was constructed around, inverting the ideal form of queenship to her advantage."
#alice perrers#historicwomendaily#14th century#english history#queenship tag#(sort of)#my post#This reminded me of something else I've been wanting to discuss#Namely: I really appreciate historians coming up with the 'quasi-queen' designation for historical women in late medieval England#(though imo there needs to be more of a discussion on actual contemporary perception of these women & if it aligned with the designation)#But I do think a side-effect of speaking of them collectively is that it tends to generalize their experiences in a way that#obscures their very different and very anomalous circumstances and tenures in power#Alice is arguably the one affected by it the most because of how fundamentally unique her situation was#Both in terms of her status (she was a commoner) and her position (as the king's mistress with an intrinsically extra-institutional power)#So I think the term 'unofficial queen' fits her actual role MUCH better#Not just because it fits her physical position by the king's side much better#But also because this was how she was explicitly recognized by contemporaries#(Poems had her 'replacing' the queen post 1369; she was called the king's 'wife'; etc)#queue#also im glad that tompkins pointed out the appearance thing because yeah lol
15 notes
·
View notes
Text
So considering the Coven Heads were at the forefront of the draining spell, like the literal beacon points for it to even work, and assuming everyone survived once the Collector moved the moon, what if all 9 of them are now magicless or significantly weaker to the point it's noticeable?
(under a read more cuz this gets long and a bit political)
Obviously they were each chosen as Coven Heads because they're all top of the top in their respective magic, so they're way stronger than the average citizen or coven scout, but being the primary draining points must've caused them a lot of damage comparable to how much stronger they are than most everyone else at the scene was. Not to mention all of them but maybe Adrian and Eberwolf either are or appear to be over 40yrs old, meaning it'd be a lot harder to bounce back from a devastating attack like that than for someone younger, even if they're all masters of their craft.
I honestly imagine there will be more physical lasting effects caused from the draining spell than just Eda losing her arm, and as tragic as it would be for Raine, Eber, and Darius to lose their magic (I don't care if the other 6 lose their magic, fuck em lol), I think it'd also be a fitting narrative conclusion for disbanding the coven system without there being a big power struggle.
Let's be real here, I doubt any of the 6 that sided with Belos are going to have any kind of personal reflection over their actions or be willing to lose their positions of power any time soon. Raine said they all expected to "become royalty" after the spell, so they knew the same amount Odalia did (though not as much as Kikimora but they all knew the same general result to expect), which was "this spell is going to kill a lot of people but I'll be safe" -- literally a 'fuck em got mine' mentality.
Which, considering they were happy to do shit like harm kids, rob people of bodily autonomy, and outright manipulate the masses for decades, these people are gonna have to really stew in it for a bit before coming to terms with their actions if they ever do, and suddenly being powerless or so weak they couldn't hold power even if they wanted to is probably the easiest way to get that to happen. When Terra in a last moment of desperation questioned if they were still going to reach paradise, that wasn't self-reflection over her decades of abusing power, that was her holding hope she wasn't wrong to do all of that. Like King said, no one wants to think they've wasted their lives following the wrong person.
As sad as it would be (for the 3 we give a shit about), it'd also be a fresh reminder to the citizens, that the strongest witches of their era all became powerless following Belos, cuz as with real life, people tend to forget things if it's been a while or if it gets twisted into propaganda. (like, America for example, 1/6/2021 was a year & a half ago and pretty much no one thinks about it anymore. Members of Congress who were actively involved in the coup never got punished or lost their seats, most people that were there never got arrested, and the committee has only just started to discuss it's findings)
Like, first is dealing with the Collector, but it's obvious that'll have some kind of positive conclusion by the series end (OR SO IT BETTER), so post Belos & Collector Era is going to be unprecedented and scary and people will probably want to cling onto what's familiar, but if the Strongest Witches Around are all powerless/super weak now, it'll keep the system from staying as easily and also be a stark reminder of why they can't go back to that. It'll be hard to twist propaganda to remember Belos fondly if the people who gave their lives to win his highest titles were hurt the most.
Disability definitely shouldn't be a punishment, I'm not trying to say that! I'm just pointing out that I can't imagine the draining spell won't have negative side effects, nor do I imagine the 6 Coven Heads that's sided with Belos will want to reconcile easily even if they did almost die given they all gladly took the bait of letting everyone else die if it meant they'd get rewarded. Plus with the way this show handles disability and depicts a number of characters flourishing in spite of how their world works I wouldn't be surprised to see more characters fall into that category. Like the tragedy of losing your traditional magic with the fall of covens but being given glyphs and palisman as wild magic returns kind of bookend storytelling.
Anyway, if those 9 don't end up magicless or significantly weaker, I kind of hope at least the sigil scars stay cuz again they got it the worst out of everyone by being the spell's focal points. Being covered in scars would also be a good reminder of Belos' lies, but also just realistic in terms of how high the stakes were. Ultimately I just wonder if there will be lasting effects from the spell, and can't really see how it'd be possible there aren't any especially for the Coven Heads, unfortunately including the three that tried to stop it all.
#toh spoilers#politics#toh theory#toh meta#as sad as itd be for raine darius & eber we've also seen eda & lilith make it work. so not only would they not be alone but the narrative#has already set this up as a Thing. the story treats disability with respect so even if this would be a 'punishment' like with lilith it#probably wouldnt be framed that way. more like 'harm only causes harm' kinda thing that gives room for these chars to self reflect#which i dont think would happen quickly but maybe it will who knows. i just really dont imagine the CH are walking away unscathed from this#i wrote this right after KT aired but waffled on posting it so im just gonna now. fuck it. i think the scars should stay if nothing else#long post#tc posts
11 notes
·
View notes
Note
This just came to me as I saw Tucker mentioned in Hero's Spirit. If you want to answer, how and what would you rewrite to give him a proper arc in DP and a main character in his own right?
The short answer is allowing him character growth. There is no fundamental difference between Episode 1 Tucker and Episode 42 (We do not discuss Phantom Planet).
Look at What You Want and King Tuck. They're basically the same episode. Tucker feels underappreciated, gets power, and goes mad with it. If he had truly grown after What You Want, King Tuck would never have happened.
In 13 Tuck was experimenting with his identity after the 'Bad Luck Tuck' thing. And it would have been nice so see him examine and find out for himself who he is outside of the technology.
Also another character trait is his continuing to bomb at asking girls out, but never learning why. That's it's not that he's a nerd but that his first reaction to a girl is hitting on her is...not great. At all.
(cut because this got long)
So I'd start with What You Want with Tucker being faced with his own jealous and the solid proof that if given the same powers as Danny, he'd be far less responsible with them. That's humbling and causes him to have to look into himself. And while I know openly talking about emotions is anathema to fourteen years old, talking to Danny about why he felt so jealous would be a good first step.
In 13 when he tries some new identities he doesn't like them, but does start asking himself who he is outside his tech. He starts trying to find other interests. Maybe he discovers while he can't carry a tune in a bucket, he does enjoy music and combines his two passions into making techno remixes with some moderate success.
At some point he vents about not being able to get a date and Sam and/or Jazz point out that of course he can't - he's made no effort to hide that he doesn't care about the girls he asks as more than someone to aim his libido at. Like, you're walking around with a checklist of girls to ask out, my dude.
So by the time we enter season two we have a more self actualized Tucker. He's found more things he's good at that he enjoys and he's finding himself outside of Danny's ectoplasmic shadow. He's starting to repair his relationship with the girls in Casper High.
And at this point Tuckers about ready to have some nemesis of his own. I can see Tenchus moving to become more his villain than Danny's, and maybe a musical rivalry with Ember, matching her singing against his techno. And his biggest enemy - himself.
This is not a philosophical battle. This is Tucker Foley vs Tucker Phantom. Remember, Danny didn't undo the wish. He used the catcher to separate Tucker from his ghosts self and trapped it. Tucker was doing the evil self in a thermos way before Dan Plasmius was introduced (I'm just...going with that name for now).
Also, as I've mentioned in a different post, here's where I'd want him to get his werewolf girlfriend, who he'd meet at a rib-eating contest. She acts as a good partner for him and possible Danny admitting he's a little jealous of Tuck since he has trouble with getting relationships to works given his double life.
When King Tuck happens, Tucker is in a much better place. Being more open with his feelings about being left out means Sam and Danny are listening to him more. He's still having trouble with the election, but he's not feeling as totally ignored. When it's revealed he's the reincarnation of Duul Aman, it's not a shortcut to power. It responsibility. Suddenly Tuck can alter reality and that's a big thing. He's kind of where Episode 1 Danny is, trying to figure out what he's going to do with a change in abilities. But there's no enslaving his class in a fit of rage. Tucker ends up winning the election, not by out popularing Dash, but by manipulating him. Point out how much work he'd be expected to do as class president, and that it would probably cut into his football time. Dash drops out of the election, leaving Tucker the winner.
With Hotep Ra at his side, Tucker starts to lean into a leadership position, not just for his class, but Team Phantom. He's never been the most fond of being physically active (Micro Management) but he has a strong analytical ability that he discovers he can use help predict and strategize battles.
And so we reach the finale, we have Tucker, no longer an insecure technogeek and wanna be lothario, but the class president and leader of Team Phantom, with a girlfriend who supports him and shares his interests. He happy, self assured, and perfectly capable of stepping up to ghost attacks without needing Danny's help. But he always has Danny's help and Danny always has his, because no matter their differences, they're best friends, brothers at heart, and above all, equals.
115 notes
·
View notes
Text
somewhere only we know | doyoung (m)
title: somewhere only we know pairing: elf!doyoung x dryad!reader genre: fantasy, major angst, fluff, smut, royal!au, 1800s!au summary: as the Crown Prince faces increasing pressure to select a wife, he finally falls in love over the course of a summerâcharmed by the sounds of nature and a mysterious tree nymph. word count:Â 32,000+ warnings: major character death, descriptions of death, familial conflict, discrimination/prejudice (both regarding familial lineage and species), classism, physical violence, descriptions of fire, voyeurism (but not in a kink context), strict gender roles/gender stereotypes, sexism/sexist language, some sexual jokes/vulgar language, outdoor sex, fingering, oral (male receiving), unprotected sex (donât try at home) a/n:Â this felt like writing a movie, especially towards the end, and i am TIYADDD. i usually actively avoid writing this many characters/plot points because it gets hard to keep things organized, so this fic was a serious test of my abilities lol... there may or may not be an epilogue after this, but that depends on the audienceâs (yâall) interest in one
as always, letâs keep in mind this is just fiction and not a judgment of or truly accurate representation of the personalities of any of the idols depicted in this story.Â
@constipation08â thank you for the request and fic idea, this has been a wild ass ride lmao đ
âWhy do we have to leave the kingdom?! I was doing just fine right here!â
âBecause our parents say we have to,â Mark replies nonchalantly, already growing weary of hearing Donghyuckâs griping about the King and Queenâs decision. The younger male throws himself onto his bed beside Mark, sighing loudly the entire time.
Donghyuck turns over on his back to give Mark a look. âBut why do we need to leave to take gentlemenâs lessons? None of us here need to learn how to be gentlemen, we already are. At least, I am.â
âYour behavior is saying otherwise,â Doyoung counters, watching the two younger men from the bedroomâs doorway. âPerhaps it wonât be that bad. Youâll get to get away from the kingdom for a few months. Itâs almost like a vacation.â
Donghyuck rolls his eyes. âNo vacation Iâve ever heard of involves work.â
âI donât know, Iâm a bit interested,â Mark says. âEveryone says Eupheme has the best gentlemenâs tutors in the country, so maybe itâll beââ
âUgh, donât say fun.â Donghyuck grabs a pillow from the head of the bed and smacks Mark across the face with it, causing the other man to yelp in surprise and topple over. They soon become embroiled in a battle of who can land the most hits with their respective pillows, which eventually evolves into them wrestling each other.
âSee, this is why mother and father say you all need etiquette lessons. Itâs like everything you learned as kids evaporated as soon as you hit puberty.â Doyoung shakes his head, but he also canât help but laugh a little at their continual bickering. âYouâll spend a few months in the company of the other princes, too, so itâs not all bad. I really donât know why youâre complaining.â
âMaybe because he wonât get to see Nayeon while heâs gone,â Mark says this while Donghyuck has him in a headlock, and the younger boyâs grip tightens around his neck.
âShut up, Mark!â
Doyoung snorts. âOh, how could I forget?â Nayeon was the daughter of a local lawmaker and someone who Donghyuck had obviously fancied for a while. Nayeon seemed to enjoy his company well enough, and she was undoubtedly within a proper social standing that everyone approved of, should marriage ever come into question. And, perhaps most importantly, she was also of elven blood. Nevertheless, there was talk that her heart had already been captured by another. âAbsence makes the heart grow fonder. Maybe sheâll realize she really is in love with you while youâre gone.â
âOr sheâll enjoy the sweet silence she gets without hearing Donghyuck chatting her ear off at every available moment.â This comment from Mark sends them into another bout of rolling around on the bed, trying to land hits on each other.
âI pity your future wife,â Donghyuck huffs as Mark tries to overtake him. âSheâll get the title of princess in exchange for what? A husband who will be too frightened to peel the sheets back on her first night!â
Doyoung rolls his eyes when he sees the fighting clearly isnât coming to an end any time soon. Despite that, he certainly isnât inclined to try to break them up; the last time he got in the middle of one of their scuffles, he ended up with an accidental black eye. The thought of trying to explain to the public what had happened was too embarrassing for words, and he was resigned to stay confined to the castle as it healed.
It would not surprise him if that incident were a part of the equation that finally convinced their parents to send them away for additional royal training. He, for one, isnât complaining about it.
Doyoung waves his hand and decides to take his leave, quickly tiring of their theatrics. âYou two have fun, then. Try not to kill each other; weâre expected to arrive in Eupheme all in one piece.â
They spend the next few days making the necessary preparations to leave for Euphemeâpicking out luggage, selecting which outfits to bring, and deciding which guards will accompany them. Their parents have already arranged for them to stay with the King and Queen of Eupheme, who they are long-time friends of, and their three sons, Jeno, Jaemin, and Jisung. Once there, Jungwoo, Mark, Donghyuck, and Sicheng will receive gentlemenâs tutoring alongside the younger three men.
Though they have been to Eupheme and the King and Queenâs home in the past as adolescents, their destination this time is a little different, with a new royal castle only just coming to completion a few years back. The King of Eupheme, always one to pull out all the stops with luxury and extravagance, had seen it fit to build a bigger and more attractive castle in the very center of the kingdom. Their old mansion would go to the oldest son and Crown Prince, Jeno, whenever he married.
The King and Queen of Ceres decide to appoint Doyoung as a chaperone for the boys because of his seniority as Crown Princeâand also because heâs the only older brother theyâll even attempt to listen to. Yuta and Jaehyun stay behind to handle other royal affairs and ambassadorial duties in Doyoungâs place. Some members of the Royal Court are far from thrilled by Doyoungâs departure and Yutaâs taking over a portion of his responsibilities in his absence, but they also know better than to air their grievances out in the open where any of the family could hear.
Yuta is initially not too pleased about being left out of the trip, but he knows there are obligations to attend to in Ceres. He also wonât deny that he relishes being given this role to play, feeling like he has obtained some heightened level of importance within the family for the first time in a long time. He tries not to be so conspicuous about how often he thinks about the position of Crown Prince, and what it might be like if he were only a year older and born of the same mother as his brothers. Yuta tends to think of himself as a master actor in maintaining his unfazed façade concerning his lowered station within the family, with no one the wiser. Well, except for the one he can trust.
Jaehyun, on the other hand, is not nearly so chagrined by having to stay as Yuta is. But of course, leaving would mean having to pause his budding romance with the daughter of the Marquess, so heâs more than willing to stay if tasked to do so.
The day of their departure comes fast. Soon, theyâre all standing outside the castle as the servants load the menâs things into several of their stagecoaches. The five of them bid their farewells to their parents and two brothers, if a bit over-exaggeratedly.
âI hope you wonât miss me too much when Iâm gone,â Donghyuck says, crowding up to Jaehyun and annoying him with kissy faces.
Jaehyun smiles and rolls his eyes. âI donât think that will be a problem. Try not to torment our cousins too much.â Even with his joking, he gives the younger boy a hug and pets his hair before letting him go off to bother Yuta.
Doyoung is already there talking with Yuta, placing his hand on the younger manâs shoulder. âTake care of things while Iâm gone, yeah? If thereâs anyone around here who can do it, itâs you.â
âOf course, brother. I always honor my duties.â Then Yuta smirks. âDonât let Jaehyun hear you saying that, though.â
Sicheng isnât happy about being separated from Yuta for a span of months, but he doesnât complain in front of the others about it. He simply gives his brother a long hug, sighing into his shoulder. âItâll be fine,â Yuta insists, trying to get Sicheng to wipe the pout off his face. âLook at the bright side of it. When you come back, youâll finally have some proper manners.â Yuta gently pinches his ear and Sicheng makes a face at that, though his lips quirk up in a small smile.
âMaybe. For their sake, perhaps these lessons wonât go to complete waste.â Sicheng glances at his other brothers as he says this, and he gives Yuta another nod before walking to one of the stagecoaches.
âDo take care of your brothers,â the Queen says to Doyoung, fixing his collar and patting his shoulders like she often did when he was smaller. Then she sighs. âWe have not been parted for such a long time in years. Hurry back, my sonâŠand please remember to be patient with themâŠyou know how they can be.â
Doyoung smiles as she pats his cheek, though he feels a little embarrassed at his motherâs fussing over him. âI promise everything will go well, mother. Weâll be back before you know it.â
Sicheng and Mark take one stagecoach while Doyoung, Donghyuck, and Jungwoo take the other; their guards and servants have another two to themselves. After everyone is loaded in, they wave goodbye to the King and Queen as they ride away from the castle and towards a summer ahead in Eupheme.
In the stagecoaches, it takes a journey of nearly three days to reach Eupheme. By then, everyone is more than ready to get some space away from each other. Their stagecoaches are more finely outfitted than the ones used for public travel by the common folk, but that still doesnât make them pleasant to keep an extended stay in. Thereâs nothing quite like being stowed up in one small space with your siblings for days to realize the value of alone time.
 The castle, they find out as they ride along the path leading to it, sits not too far from a nearby village. Beyond that village, an expansive forest stretches out along the land. As to be expected, new property comes with new people and sights.
 The princes had not last visited Eupheme since before the new castle was completed; now, all this newness comes as a welcome surprise. Donghyuck and Jungwoo press their faces up against the stagecoach window to catch glimpses of the village through the trees as they drive past. Itâs raining lightly outside, and the waterdrops slide against the windowpanes as they peer out, obscuring their vision slightly.
Doyoung can already see the rapt excitement in their eyes. âRemember we didnât come here to play in the village all day,â Doyoung tells the others, sighing deeply as he already knows what their plans will be
âDoesnât mean we wonât, brother,â Jungwoo chuckles, and Donghyuck voices his agreement.
In Sicheng and Markâs stagecoach, they also look at the scenery with fascination.
âItâs quite different from their old home,â Sicheng remarks. âBut prettier.â
Mark presses his palm against the stagecoachâs interior wall, beside the windowpane, and focuses his energy to create a small portal to the outside. He sticks his hand through it to feel the raindrops pattering against his fingers; the air outside is humid and sticky.
âShowboat. You couldâve just opened the window,â Sicheng points out, though he smirks in amusement.
Their cousinsâ castle is a grand thing. Itâs similar to their own in many ways, but one thing the Euphemian royals have always prided themselves on is their outstanding landscaping. Their front lawn, backyard, and the surrounding fields create a vast world of their own, filled with intricately-shaped hedges, rare flowers, unique stone statues, and even a winding maze of greenery leading to the castleâs front entrance. It was more than enough land for anyone to get lost in for days. One could spend a week just traversing their entire property aloneâforget the village and forest.
As their entourage of stagecoaches makes its way through the path to the mansion, the men talk more excitedly with each other, planning the things they hope to do once they get settled in. The King and Queen of Eupheme and their three sons are already standing in front of the castle steps ready to greet them once they arrive.
âDoyoung!â Jeno calls out the princeâs name as soon as he sees his head pop out of the window, and Doyoung waves excitedly to the younger man as he and the others get out.
Once all five men exit the carriage, they bow to the King and Queen.
âIt is so good to see you all again after such a long time,â the Queen says, clasping her hands together with a warm smile.
âSurely, youâve all grown into fine young men.â The King is a big, intimidating man, even for someone of his rank, and the current smile he wears does little to take away from that fact, but the five men return the gesture all the same.
The men get reacquainted with their cousins as the servants unload their things from the stagecoaches.
âYouâve grown up so much. Let me look at you,â Doyoung says, fawning over Jeno as the other men look on and laugh.
âYou act worse than a parent,â Jungwoo says, giggling at Jenoâs blushing face.
Sicheng nods his agreement, looking at the two with an embarrassed expression. âQuite obviouslyâwhy do you think they picked him to be our chaperone?â
âCome on, weâll give you a tour around the castle,â Jisung says, excitedly pulling Mark and Donghyuck along with him as he heads for the castle steps.
âI think weâll be walking around for an entire day.â Donghyuck snickers. âItâs huge.â
Jisung grins, a knowing glance in his eyes. âAn entire day? Oh, cousin, thatâs just the east wing.â
Unsurprisingly, the group of brothers arenât immediately unleashed to go exploring in the village.
Their tutors have them settle into a couple weeks of lessons before adding unsupervised free time to their schedules for them to do whatever they please with. Itâs not a lot at firstâonly 30 minutes at a timeâbut Doyoung knows thatâs more than enough time for them to get into trouble, if they so wish.
The men were hardly impressed with being treated like reckless children and would take whatever chance they could to escape the tutorsâ watchful eyes, which meant staying on their best behavior and trying to adhere to all their professorsâ instructions until they were granted more leniency.
By that point, their instructors were almost being driven crazy by the menâs frequent and not-so-subtle side conversations about what theyâd see in the village once they finally got there.
âAlright, here is your first free break of the day. Go on, make use of it. I say, Iâve never seen a bunch of royals so infatuated with what the commoners are doing,â their music tutor exclaims, shaking his head. âWouldnât you much rather stay in here where things are clean and predictable and safeâand most importantly, clean?â
âHmm, no. Cleanâs boring!â Donghyuck counters, and heâs the first one to take off and leave the room once heâs gathered all his things. The rest of the men soon trail out of the room after him, with Doyoung heading up the rear. By their parentsâ request, he usually sits in on their lessons to make sure they follow their tutorsâ orders, or to help them out with whatever questions they have if the teacher is preoccupied with someone else.
âAre you all going to accompany us?â Donghyuck asks Jeno after the older man catches up to him in the hallway.
Jeno gives him a suspicious look. âAccompany you where?â
Donghyuck lowers his voice to prevent Doyoung from overhearing their conversation. âWeâre going to visit the village today, see the lay of the land. Thereâs no time to waste, so if you want to comeâŠâ
Jeno shakes his head, a slightly unimpressed look coloring his features. âYou go on ahead. If youâve seen it once, youâve seen it a thousand times before.â
Donghyuck looks at him skeptically, then claps a hand on his back. âSuit yourself!â
It doesnât take long for Donghyuck to convince Sicheng, Jungwoo, and Mark to use their free time to go to the village with him, and they decide to take the horses to shorten the time itâll take to get there. They bypass their rooms and head straight outside for the stable, leaving their books and writing utensils sitting in a heap in a corner to avoid wasting any precious time with putting their things away.
While theyâre out in the stable, Donghyuck fawns endlessly over the horses. Heâs particularly drawn to an all-black one with a shiny coat and an impossibly long mane. Her expressions are almost elven-like, her eyes showing a certain eerie understanding of the words he speaks to her. A large golden label on her stall reads Lily in black curly lettering.
âSheâs amazing,â Donghyuck says, gently stroking her muzzle as she peers at him with her huge black eyes. Mark and Jungwoo come over to take a look at the mare, and Mark agrees to Donghyuckâs observation, grinning softly as he brushes his fingers along Lilyâs soft coat. Their moment is suddenly disturbed, however, by a voice coming from the stable entrance. The three of them jump a little in surprise.
âWhere are you all going?â Itâs Doyoung, of course. Donghyuck scoffs and rolls his eyes, trying to ignore his older brother as he keeps petting the horse.
âWeâre going out,â Sicheng says, laughing from the other side of the stable as he leads one of the horses out of its stall.
âObviously, but where?â Doyoung walks further into the stable with the other boys, though he screws up his face at the strong smell of horse and hay. Much like the others, riding horses is an activity he quite fancies, but he doesnât enjoy the smell of it.
âLeave us for once, brother, please! If you come with us, itâs just going to spoil the mood. Between the tutors and the King and Queen, we have enough overbearing people breathing down our necks.â Mark shushes Donghyuck at that, as if he half expects the King and Queen themselves to come out from the shadows and reprimand them.
Doyoung crosses his arms. âI have no intentions of stopping you, but Iâm also not going to let you return here with a herd of angry townspeople on your tail if you do something to set them off.â
âYes, which means youâll stop us from doing anything fun,â Sicheng retorts, nearly pouting. Heâs used his sad eyes and natural charm on his older brothers to get his way in many situations in the past, but Doyoung isnât budging this time.
âDoyoung is going to come regardless, can the rest of you just bear with it so we can leave?â Jungwoo says impatiently, leading one of the other horses out and fixing its saddle on. âWe donât have all day to argue.â
âFine.â Sicheng and Donghyuck arenât thrilled about the prospect of having their older brother tag along to thwart any mischievous plans they mightâve had. They donât truly hate it, though; they rarely miss an opportunity to try to get on his nerves if they can, and now is no exception.
After theyâve all picked a steed, they mount their horses and take off to leave the castle.
On the horses, it takes only 5 or 6 minutes to reach the village rather than the 20 minutes theyâd spend walking there. When they get there, they are greeted by a sign that reads Arthenia Village. It shows obvious signs of wear, but it looks to have been recently covered with a fresh coat of green paint.
From the first glance, itâs easy to tell that the small town mostly consists of supernatural beingsâthough they could figure that from the atmosphere alone. The air is thick with magic, and it dances across their skin like static. Fairies and orcs and the occasional elf like themselves walk, ride, or fly through the streets, plus many more beings beyond those. Even a small portion of humans live there, though they blend in almost seamlessly with the othersâexcept for their lack of a magical aura.
Some townspeople stop to watch the men enter the village as they trot down the cobbled streets on their horses, all dressed up in their fineries. In the menâs own eyes, their outfits are quite average for a day of schooling, but the villagers rarely see such luxury in their daily lives.
The townspeople are not really used to interacting with royalty, due to the castleâs inhabitants mostly keeping to their own circles of nobilityâand seeing everyone else as beneath them, even if they donât immediately concede to it. Some villagers are in awe of their entrance, while others look on with expressions of contempt. Donghyuck doesnât mind the glares, though, and waves excitedly to anyone whoâll wave back.
âI wonder about you sometimes,â Mark says to the younger man, and he narrowly avoids Donghyuck trying to reach out and swipe him off his horse.
They eventually dismount the horses and tie them up at a nearby stall so they can walk around the Market Square. Thereâs little danger of anyone trying to make off with one of the animals; their saddles decorated with the royal colors and insignia would immediately incriminate any person whoâd attempt it. And in any case, a punishment of being sent to the guillotine is more than enough to keep potential thieves away.
Arthenia may be small, but itâs still filled with a distinct culture and a sense of hominess, with people selling their homemade wares and groups of little kids playing and weaving through the streets. A group of girls gathered at a small jewelry shop whisper animatedly among themselves as they watch the men walk by, and they freeze when Doyoung meets their eyes. He waves to them with a warm smile on his face, just as he was taught to do, and they wave back enthusiastically, their free hands covering their mouths to disguise their giggles.
Jungwoo quickly becomes entangled in a game of Horseshoes with a group of adolescents who bet he canât beat them at their own game. And, despite Sichengâs earlier complaints, he ends up trailing behind Doyoung for most of their trip, unsure how to interact with the villagers except for following his etiquette training and simply smiling politely at them. If he were in an âI told you soâ kind of mood, Doyoung mightâve pointed out the irony of the situation, but he decides to let it be, knowing Sicheng is still trying to adjust.
At the very edge of the village, a small dirt pathway gives way to the same forest they saw on their way to the castle. The expanse of the forest is easier to see when outside of Arthenia itself; it spreads like a thick patch of dark green against the lighter green fields and hills. Up close and personal, though, the forest entrance is thick with foliage, making it hard to see through. The unknown nature of it beckons. Donghyuck catches Markâs eyes lingering in that direction, and he comes up next to the older man, throwing his arm across his shoulders.
âIs that our next conquest?â he proposes, mischief written across his face. âWant to see what lies there?â
Mark looks back at him, his eyes sparkling with anticipation. âIâm willing if you are.â
A seller at a nearby stallâan elderly orcâoverhears their conversation and shakes his head, chuckling as if heâs just heard something utterly ridiculous. âYoung men...donât go in there with bad intentions. The women will drive you out.â
Donghyuck and Mark turn to him with confusion written on their faces. âWomen?â
âThere are women who live in the trees,â the seller continues. âThey protect the trees, protect the forest. Everything there is under their dominion. Before you step foot in there, make sure youâre thinking with your head up top,â he taps a finger against the side of his head, âand not the one between your legs.â
âU-um, that wasnâtâalright.â Mark is openly flustered at being called out, and Donghyuck only laughs, steering Mark away from the stall and back towards the heart of the village.
âDonât get so discomfited about it, brother. Desires of the flesh are natural for men.â Donghyuck slaps Mark on the chest, and the other coughs a bit at the sudden hit.
âBut do you think he said that just to deter us? Or is it true?â
âIâd say thereâs only one way to find out.â
Sicheng turns a corner and nearly runs into them, and they both startle at his sudden appearance. âWhatever youâre so eager to find out, itâs not happening today. Itâs time to go back already.â Heâs no more happy about it than they are, though, rolling his eyes at the prospect of heading back to the mansion when thereâs still much to see.
âAlready?â Donghyuck questions Sicheng as he starts heading back to the Market Square where their horses are stationed. Sicheng unfolds his pocketwatch and shows him the time, nodding without a word before continuing on. âAh, shit. Weâll see the forest next time, then. Donât forget! Weâve got to make haste.â
âRemember what that old man said, though,â Mark says, calling back to Donghyuck as he follows Sicheng. âWe arenât using up all our break time to find lovers or concubines.â
Donghyuck scoffs. âWho do you take me for? No one can find a lover in just 30 minutes, Mark, unless itâs you. Then youâd only need 5 minutes at most.â Then he takes off through the streets as Mark chases after him, threatening to kick his ass once he lays his hands on him.
Itâs another week before they can make it out to the villageâand therefore, the forestâagain, but once the time rolls around, Donghyuck is once again the first out of the castle with Mark on his tail. Jungwoo and Sicheng decide to tag along too, along with Doyoung, which none of them are particularly surprised about.
The villagersâ responses are less awe-struck this time, though some of them still express some surprise at seeing the men come to their little town two weeks in a row. Many of them give friendly waves, though others look on with skepticism as they see the men heading for the woods. They pass by the same elderly orc from last week, who gives them a knowing look; Mark shoots him a nervous smile in return.
Entering the woods on horses requires them to duck their heads a bit to avoid the overhanging foliage threatening to poke them in the eyes or get tangled in their hair. A few of them gripe about this, but they quickly grow captivated with interest as they journey deeper into the terrain and survey the woods.
âThis place is nice,â Jungwoo comments. His eyes dart to and fro, though, as if he expects one of the aforementioned women to come out of nowhere and sternly rebuke them for entering their forest abode.
âI canât wait to see what kind of beautiful women live in this forest,â Donghyuck announces.
âDonât be so eager, Iâm positive none of them would be interested in a kid,â Sicheng scoffs. No sooner do the words leave Sichengâs lips do a pair of pinecones come falling out of a tall pine tree just a ways above their heads. One only narrowly misses Sicheng, but the other catches Donghyuck on the shoulder.
âOw! Did you see that?â He grabs his shoulder as if itâs injured and whips his head to look up at the pineâs towering trunk, but thereâs no sign of anything other than a few unsuspecting birds.
Doyoung shakes his head. âI wouldnât say anything else foolish if I were you, brother. Seems like the forest already has something against you.â He laughs to himself, steering his horse away from the others to explore more of the woods.
âItâs not the forest, itâs the women that stall vendor was talking about,â Donghyuck insists, looking over his shoulder for any more falling objects.
âSure. Next, you will tell us youâre no longer an elf.â Sicheng is less convinced by the presence of the dryads than the other men, but heâs along for the ride anyway. He will at least get to see what all the fuss is about, and even if itâs not true, heâll have some time away from the castle. Although the King and Queen are as dutifully welcoming as they should be, he canât shake the feeling of the Kingâs judgment brewing just underneath the surface. Itâs like his aura intentionally closes itself off to the younger man, too haughty and refined to be in the presence of a concubineâs son.
âLetâs just keep on and see what we come across,â Mark says, steering his horse around a fallen log as he traverses further ahead.
Doyoung catches sight of a large oak tree just a little ways off. It doesnât look much different from the other trees around, save for a hollow hole in its front, but heâs intrigued by it and decides to look more closely. Once he gets over to it, he climbs off his horse and walks up to its large trunk, carefully maneuvering around the thick roots beneath his feet.
Cautiously peeking into the hollow, he sees a nest, but there are no current occupants. He presses one hand against the trunk and feels the grooves and ridges of its texture underneath his palm. It feels old and powerful, and he guesses it mustâve been here for a long time already.
Doyoung hears rustling a few feet above him from the branches, and a few leaves drift down, brushing his face. He expects to see some bird or squirrel when he looks up, maybe the owner of the nest come back to object to his snooping around, but heâs shocked at the sight of a woman.
Doyoung only catches a glimpse of you, for when you notice him looking at you, you gasp and dart further up into the treeâs branches, causing more leaves to fall on the way. Doyoung shields his eyes from them as they come cascading around him, but he fails to get another look. Itâs like the tree has enveloped you entirely, hiding you from view.
âThat was odd,â he says aloud. So the sellerâs words were true after all. He lingers for a while longer, hoping to maybe stay long enough to see you again, but youâve disappeared. Heâs a bit reluctant to leave, but itâs apparent youâre not going to reappear while heâs still around, so he leads his horse away by its reins and looks for the others.
âI saw something,â he says as soon as he spots Donghyuck. âOr someone.â
âSeriously?â Donghyuckâs eyes light up. âWhat did she look like? Was she pretty? Did you get her name?â
ââWas she pretty?â Is that all you can think about?â Doyoung sighs. âI didnât get anything. I barely saw her. She was among the tree branches one minute and gone the next.â Donghyuck slumps a bit at that, but heâs still determined to see one of the forestâs female inhabitants for himself.
âHmmmâŠno matter. Thereâs many more chances where that came from. We can always return later and see who shows up.â
Their conversation is cut short by a nearby shout from Mark, whoâs loudly complaining about his head. Apparently heâs been struck by something much messier than a pineconeâa robinâs egg. âUgh. What have you fools gotten into?!â Donghyuck calls out, spurring on his horse.
Doyoung mounts his own horse and follows the younger man in search of their brothers. Just before they get out of sight of the oak tree, Doyoung throws a glance backwards, still burning with curiosity. Heâs startled to see the same face from earlier staring back at him from the uppermost reaches of the tree, your eyes wide with an inquisitiveness he thinks must mirror his own.
When he blinks, you are gone again.
Even though the other men look at him a bit oddly for it, Doyoung decides to bring a gift the next time they go to the forest.
He doesnât know much about tree nymphs. He does know, however, that there is a library full of books in the castle; many being history and reference books, no doubt. After visiting the library one day after his brothersâ lessons, he manages to scrape up a little information on tree nymphsâor dryads, as theyâre also calledâeven though he isnât entirely sure what heâs looking for.
His research tells him the tree nymphs are friends of the gods and goddesses, and history shows that the higher beings have always likedâeven demanded forâgifts. So why wouldnât the women of the forest be the same way? Maybe if he brings a gift, the women will warm up to their presence and realize they arenât just a bunch of horny travelers. At the very least, maybe they wouldnât have any more pinecones and eggs thrown at them.
When the brothers get a chance to go to the forest again, Doyoung carries a couple cinnamon scones and a small, bright clementine from their earlier breakfast in his saddlebag. The chefâs scones are the best heâs ever tasted, and he doesnât think he could ever go back to eating the ones from their cook back homeânot that heâd ever say that out loud, though.
Everyone likes food, right? He figures thereâs no way to go wrong with this idea, and even if the girl in the oak tree doesnât like it, maybe one of the other tree nymphs or woodland creatures can eat it.
You arenât in sight when he stops by the oak tree again. Donghyuck, whoâs accompanying Doyoung on his personal quest, watches as he leaves the food in the small tree hollow, keeping it carefully wrapped in its blue and white handkerchief.
âYou think sheâll take it?â Donghyuck asks, keeping his voice low. He doesnât really want you to hear him talking about you if youâre still around somewhere, which could possibly alert you to their presence and scare you off again. But unbeknownst to him, thatâs unlikely to happen; dryads always know when someone enters their forest.
âI wouldnât reject free food,â Doyoung says, laughing quietly. He steps back once heâs finished with his job and looks towards the branches, as if he expects you to appear right then and accept his offering. That wonât likely happen, but he wouldnât mind seeing what you look like more closely.
âWell, come on then.â Donghyuck waves his hand. âThereâs still more to see. We can double back and see if it worked later.â
They hear rustling among the trees as they guide their horses through one of the forestâs many paths, but they donât see any signs of the dryads. Thereâs only the occasional forest creature, such as a racoon or squirrel. Mark, Sicheng, and Jungwoo are farther away in another part of the woods, though the two men can hear them talking faintly, their voices carrying on the wind. Sunlight from the midday sun filters through the leaves, turning the landscape into a speckled show of light and shadow.
When Donghyuck and Doyoung get far enough away from the oak tree, they eventually come across a lake that splits the forest in half. Itâs not very wide, but if you tried to jump across it youâd almost certainly land in the water instead of on dry land.
There are signs that sprites have recently been near the lake, or quite possibly live within the forest. The ground is littered with half-eaten berries and chewed-on leaves, but thatâs not the only clue; that could be the work of any forest animal. Sprites, however, leave a very distinct tinge of magic in places theyâve visited. Itâs akin to walking through a spiderweb, or feeling the air change when you go from the hot outdoors to a cold room. Doyoung almost swears he can hear tiny tinkling laughter next to his ear, though it fades away as soon as he turns around.
Donghyuck is more interested in the lake, though, and guides his horse to walk along the edge of the grass where the water begins. âDo you figure we could go swimming in it?â he calls back to Doyoung.
Doyoung scoffs. âNow?â
âOf course not now! Maybe some other day, when we donât have 20 other things to do.â
âMaybe. The water seems safe enoughâŠâ Doyoung peers into the running waters himself, watching a few twigs and stray leaves float past. There arenât any apparent dangers or concerns, and the waterâs shallow enough where you can see the bottom of the lake, but appearances arenât always as they seem. Itâs always essential to be wary in magically-charged places like this forest.
They ride through the woods for a while longer, listening to birds cry out from the trees and sing softer chirps that serve as background music. Despite the forestâs inherent mystery, itâs almost calming at this moment, with the steady hum of wildlife around. Itâs like time has been suspended and theyâve been enveloped in a dimension separate from their own, even though they can see familiar signs of life prospering all around them. The contradiction of the forestâs calm and unsettling quality is both strange and wonderful to experience.
By the time their half-hour of exploration starts running out, they circle back to the grand oak tree to see whatâs become of Doyoungâs offering. Heâs actually a bit surprised to see it gone, handkerchief and all, and he gets off his horse to inspect the tree hollow.
âIt worked!â Donghyuck exclaims this a little too loudly and a nearby bird takes off. He flinches reflexively, expecting another pinecone to come hurtling at him from the trees, though none do.
âIt did,â Doyoung agrees, pressing his fingers against the wood as he looks into the tree hollow. Heâs even more pleased than he expected to be, a small grin playing on his lips. âIt did.â
Doyoung leaves more gifts over the next few weeks, which ends up in him actually buying things for your merriment. Many of them are cute and inexpensive little trinkets from the Market Square, like smooth blue moonstones and jagged sharp crystals that the vendors swear have been blessed with witchesâ magic, though he often still leaves food.
Even with these regular visits, heâs still yet to catch more than a few glimpses at a time of you. Unbeknownst to him and Donghyuck, these sightings, no matter how sparse they are, are largely due to you throwing them a bone and allowing them to perceive you. At any other time, it would be all too easy to just disappear completely and wait for them to leave after depositing their offerings.
They donât always see you when they come to the tree, but it happens enough to be worth noting.
Despite this inability to get you to stay, Donghyuck still tries his luck with calling out greetings to your retreating form. These words, no matter how friendly they are, are often swallowed up in the rustling of the leaves.
The same thing happens today. Donghyuck spots your feet peeking out from an uppermost branch, not quite concealed by the leaves, and he rushes out the first thing he can think of to say. âHey, thereââ At the sound of his voice, though, you quickly retreat. âUh, nice tree-climbing skills? Oh, alright, okayâŠâ
âI donât think she wants to talk right now,â Doyoung remarks, a smirk on his face as he goes to leave his token for today. This time, itâs another food gift; a pair of peaches and a biscuit with jam.
âThatâs fine!â Donghyuck tries not to seem embarrassed about his fruitless greetings. âIâll just keep greeting her until she does feel like answering. It would be rude not to say hello otherwise! Unlike someone else here. Not very princely of you, huh, brother?â
Donghyuck sticks his tongue out at his brother and spurs his horse to gallop off into the trees, feeling the air whip past his cheeks. In the back of his mind, he himself knows why he keeps calling out to you even if he wonât get an answer, though he doesnât intend on letting Doyoung know why. Some things are better kept to oneself; heâs had to learn that lesson over time.
He eventually ends up on a small hill in the forest, which is surrounded by tall trees and covered in sparse patches of moss. He hears giggling above him from one of the trees, though when he turns his head to look, thereâs nothing there.
Still chagrined from the time he got hit with a pinecone, he keeps his head turned skyward, trying to see if he can spot anything among the tree canopy. However, all he sees is green and more green. Heâs about to give up and go about his way when an acorn comes zooming down and hits him square in the forehead.
âHey!â he shouts, rubbing the sore spot on his head. His exclamation reverberates off the tree trunks and bounces back to him. The echo of it almost overtakes the small set of giggles from just in front of him, but his ear catches them. âWhoever you are, come out!â
Donghyuckâs horse whinnies softly but does nothing else to alert him to where the possible culprit might be hiding, and he sighs heavily. He decides to get off the horse to walk around the area, inspecting it more closely as the wind stirs his hair and tickles his ears. The forest is almost eerily silent the entire time; all Donghyuck can hear is the sound of his own breaths and his boots in the grass.
Suddenly, he yells when a mop of black hair falls on top of his head. The shock of it sends him falling to the ground, dirtying his pants. When he gets enough distance between himself and the strange black hair, he realizes itâs one of the tree nymphs. Not you from the oak tree, though, to his slight disappointment. This one hangs upside down from a thick branch as she looks at him, her eyes playful and bright.
âYouâre a cute one, arenât you?â Her voice sounds like windchimes tinkling in the breeze, light and airy. Donghyuck tries to respond, but he finds himself lost for words after finally facing one of the women who have been an enigma this entire time. When she sees he isnât responding, she says, âCat got your tongue?â
âWho...whereâŠ?â Donghyuck scrambles to his feet, and the girl rights herself on her tree branch, skittering along the length of it to hide partway behind the tree trunk. She doesnât appear to actually be shy or apprehensive, though. Her grin tells him that this is all part of her game.
âHmm. Well, when you figure out what youâd like to say, call for me.â The girl disappears completely behind the tree trunk, and Donghyuck darts behind it, expecting to see her still hiding there. However, thereâs nothing but air.
âBut I donât know your name?â Donghyuck calls after her, but thereâs only his own voice reflected back to him.
âDonât know whose name?â Markâs voice makes Donghyuck turn around in surprise, a blush coloring his cheeks. He hadnât even heard the older manâs horse come trotting up.
âNo one,â he mumbles, shaking his head as he walks back to his horse. âYou must be hearing things.â
You and three other dryads sit in a circle in a small clearing one night, talking amongst yourselves, eating berries, and gazing at the moon as it shines directly upon your little spot. Cassia lays her head in your lap, her long black hair splaying across your legs. The other two, Peony and Daphne, cuddle close to each other, their legs entangling as they feed each other berries.
You all only come out like this when youâre sure the forest is free of any unwelcome visitors or sudden drop-ins, so you can enjoy each otherâs company in peace and talk without prying ears or eyes. And speak of the devilâthe subject soon turns to the men whoâve been gallivanting through the forest as of late.
âWe can never have any peace,â Cassia says, though her tone is laced with laughter. âIf it isnât one group of thirsty and untouched men, itâs another.â
âThat one man always comes around this area, the one with the long hair. Along with the rest of themâŠall on their horses, making so much noise and chaos,â Peony complains.
âItâs impossible not to notice their presence. I wish theyâd just stay wherever they come from; they make far too much noise out here,â Daphne says, shaking her head. âThey must scare away every woodland creature within a 20-foot radius.â
Youâre quiet and thoughtful as you listen to the other girlsâ complaints. Finally, you decide to chime in. âI donât know. They do seem a bit mannerless at times, but theyâre kind of interesting.â
Peony shrugs. âNot surprised youâd say that. The one with the long hair is always looking up your tree and leaving you gifts.â
âShe just doesnât want the stream of admiration to stop,â Cassia giggles.
You sigh. âI donât think itâs quite that simple, but whatever you say.â
âEveryone in the world likes attention, itâs nothing to be ashamed of,â Cassia admits, âespecially when itâs coming from someone who isnât half-bad. This batch of men is by far the most attractive weâve seen in a while.â
âHmm, if you say so,â Peony says, and her and Daphne giggle to themselves like theyâre in on a joke only the two of them know.
âHe must think heâll get in your good graces if he gives you enough presents,â Daphne adds in. âWhat say you?â
You tilt your head and think. âGet in my good graces? That depends on what he wants.â
âWhat he wants?â Peony separates herself from Daphne and crawls over to you, mischief shining in her eyes. âAnd what do you think he wants?â Her grin doesnât diminish as she waits for your answer. Daphne smiles and laughs and licks berry juice off her hands as she observes you both.
You stare at the other girl for a long moment, not wanting to laugh but cracking a grin anyway. âI couldnât possibly know! Maybe you should ask himâor ask the younger one you all have been obsessed with.â
Cassia stretches her arms upwards toward the night sky, crossing her fingers over each other. âNope. Heâs just fun to tease.â
âFun enough for you to reveal yourself to him,â you point out.
âSay what you will,â she responds. âBut at some point, you will probably have to talk to the man. Think carefully. You want to make a good impression on your not-so-secret admirer, donât you?â
âMaybe,â you say nonchalantly, though you are already thinking of what you might say to him the next time he comes around.
Daphne looks to Cassia, then at you. âWell, just remember this. I wouldnât waste too much of my good time with him if I were you. We all know elves donât like us.â The mood shifts a bit at this, with the three of you giving each other unsettled looks as a familiar thought drifts in the back of your minds. It is not uncommon for elves to demean other species, nor is it rare for them to use this perceived superiority to take what they want from others.
Cassia pulls up a handful of grass and throws it at the other girl. âMust you spoil the mood? Weâre just having a bit of fun. Besides, these elves obviously donât object to us if they keep hanging around here unprovoked.â
âIâm trying to look out for the best interest of a fellow dryad,â Daphne protests. âElven men are very seductiveâŠeverything you want them to be until theyâre not. But, by all means, do as you please.â
âLike Cassia said, itâs just fun.â You keep your voice nonchalant, though you are already rising to your feet to walk back to your tree. âAnd thank you for the concernâŠalthough Iâm not certain itâs warranted.â
The other girls let you walk back alone, knowing you need a bit of time to yourself to think. You wonder what the manâs motive could truly be, and what it means for you. The elves of Arthenia have historically been easy to get along with as they donât share the views of many others in their race. The same canât always be said for elven people outside of this small area, though.
You suppose thereâs only one way to find out.
One day, Doyoung manages to go out to the forest by himself while his brothers are still busy with their studies.
He plans to leave you something again, maybe hoping to see you fully this time, though heâs also content to just be out in nature and enjoy the scenery if thatâs not possible. At least thatâs what he tells himself. Fortunately for him, Lady Luck takes his side today.
After getting off his horse, he heads straight for your oak tree with his gift in hand. Itâs a small piece of dyed glass that he got from the Market Square, shaped like a maple leaf. It appears to change colors when held up to the light, as if it were a real leaf with the sun shining through its cells.
Youâre already sitting on one of the upper branches when he comes to the tree. He stops in his tracks, thinking you might run off again if he comes any closer, but you simply sit and look at him, your knees close to your chest. He thinks about what a precarious position that is to take on a tree branch, but youâre obviously used to keeping your balance up there.
Thereâs a tense silence. Doyoungâs afraid you might leave, but heâs surprised when you stay put as the seconds tick past, wrapping your arms around your knees and watching him. When he becomes a little more confident that you wonât try to escape, he steps closer, albeit slowly. âHello,â he says, keeping his voice even and quiet. Like heâs speaking to something vulnerable and scared.
After a few beats of silence, you say, âHi.â
âItâs nice to meet you. Iâm...Doyoung.â
âDoyoung.â You cock your head, weighing whether you should tell him your name or not, but you eventually do.
âItâs a pretty name,â he says, and he actually means it rather than saying it just to be polite. âUmâŠâ He looks to the glass leaf in his hand, which is cradled in another handkerchief. âI was wondering if Iâd ever get to see you in person.â
âIâm always here,â you say.
Doyoung nods and chuckles. âWell...I canât argue with that.â
âYouâre always here, too. With your group of men. Making so much noise that you scare all the creatures in the forest away.â
Doyoung winces. He already knew that they werenât the quietest mice in the bunch whenever they came to the forest. âIâm...sorry about that. Iâll tell the others to keep it down from now on.â
You nod. âThat would be nice. The other girls donât like the noise.â
âWhat about you?â
You shrug. âTheyâre not wrong for being irritated about it.â
âCould this make up for it? At least, for you?â Doyoung pulls away the handkerchief and holds the glass leaf up for you to see. You climb down from your high post to look at it more closely, though you donât leave the tree entirely; you just balance on one of the lower branches.
âItâs pretty,â you whisper, and Doyoung notices your eyes seem to sparkle a bit more at the sight of the ornament even though your outer demeanor is calm.
âThen Iâll leave it here.â Doyoung tucks it into the small tree hollow where heâs always put the rest of his presents.
âThank you,â you tell him quietly, and he is surprised to see a slight smile on your face; the first one heâs ever seen from you. He realizes heâs staring at you a little longer than he should and catches himself.
âAh, y-youâre welcome.â
You nod but donât say anything more, and Doyoung knows he ought to speak again soon if he doesnât want to surrender this small opportunity heâs had to talk to you.
âAre there...many of you here?â
âDryads?â
âAh, yes...dryads.â
âThere are many, yes,â you answer. âNot every tree has a keeper; some are just empty. But many do. We live in our trees.â
âIn?â Doyoung realizes this may be referring to something other than just literally living among the branches, which he didnât think of until now. You nod.
âMaybe itâs a little different from your elven magic.â You glance at his ears and momentarily think of the conversation you had with the other dryads. âBut itâs a type of magic all the same.â
âI seeâŠâ Doyoung remembers to file that bit of information away so he can tell Donghyuck, whoâs been burning to know. The books in the library only provided so many answers, much to their disappointment, with them not having much recorded information on the tree nymph race. Dryads seemed to be a thing of mystery to many, though he could easily guess why.
âYouâre not Eupheme-born,â you say abruptly. âWhere do you hail from?â
âThe kingdom of Ceres,â Doyoung answers. You nod, and he takes this as recognition. âHave you been there before?
You shake your head. âI canât leave the forest.â
âYou canât? Why?â
âWeâre connected to the trees. They keep us alive, and vice versa. If weâre separated over too far of a distance, both will die.â
âThatâs grim,â Doyoung says, his eyebrows drawing together. âDonât you ever want to leave? Go somewhere else? It canât be happy to be chained to one place forever.â
You raise your eyebrows and laugh, incredulous at his statement. âChained? The forest is my home. Thereâs nowhere else Iâd ever want to be.â
Doyoung shrugs. âYou have a much stronger constitution than me, then. I donât know that Iâd want to be tied to any one place for my entire life.â
You squint your eyes, staring at him carefully. âYouâre royalty, arenât you?â He nods in response. âEnjoy your freedom while it lasts. You can come to this forest however you please and have fun, but youâll have to have a family sooner or later...something more permanent to tie you to this world.â You slip down from your branch, letting your feet touch the ground, and Doyoung steps back a little to give you space. âMen like to roam and be free and sow their wild oats. Theyâre more than welcome to do that, but Iâll stay here among the trees.â
He stares at you in wonder, your words repeating in his head as you gingerly take his gift out of the hollow. You turn back to him momentarily, giving him a quick parting smile and a nod before skipping off into the trees.
âA letter came!â Jungwoo holds up a cream-colored envelope that sports their familyâs familiar crest on a wax seal on the back. Itâs a letter from their parentsâtheir first correspondence since the men have left the castle.
âWhat does it say?â Mark and Donghyuck crowd around him to persuade him into opening the envelope faster. Before Jungwoo can read it, Sicheng plucks it out of his hand and holds it up to the light, making a show of squinting at the inky black handwriting. âWell? Go on!â Donghyuck prods him.
âHmm...â Sicheng purses his lips and crinkles his brows as if concentrating hard, then gives them all a sly smile. âIt says youâre all kicked off the inheritance and Iâm becoming the next Crown Prince.â
Doyoung shakes his head and takes the letter from Sicheng as the younger man laughs. The other three boys balk at his attempt at a joke, and Doyoung knows the atmosphere could easily turn awkward if he doesnât step in now. âAnyway. Letâs see what it really says, Iâm sure they must be missing our presenceâŠâ
They all stand around Doyoung as he reads the letter out to them, trying to look over his shoulder as if he canât read fast enough to satisfy their curiosity.
âDear boys, we hope Eupheme has been finding you well.
Affairs in Ceres have been running as normal in your absence, thankfully, and Yuta and Jaehyun have been handling their new duties well. They also send their regards and hope to see you back soon.
âThere is also important news for our Doyoungie. We are considering a potential match for youâthe Duke of Ceresâ daughter, with whom you should already be familiarâand plan to set a meeting as soon as you return at summerâs end. We think you will find her very agreeable...â Doyoungâs voice falters a bit.
âAw, is our indecisive brother finally going to become a married man this year?â Jungwoo slings his arm around Doyoungâs shoulders, and the older man lets out a puff of air.
âBy the beginning of next year, who wants to bet?â Donghyuck snickers. âGirls naturally love you, it wonât take long for you to charm her. Either way, itâs not like you have very much longer to wait.â Mark elbows him in the side and he complains in turn, but not before cuffing Mark over the head.
â...I suppose.â That comment about being a âladiesâ manâ might have drawn a laugh or two or even a boast if it were said months ago, but now Doyoung just feels strangely unsettled about it allâthe impending courtship and his inevitable marriage. He continues reading the rest of the letter, though if someone were to ask him later, he wouldnât be able to remember the rest of the words.
âWe think you will find her very agreeable and are thrilled for you to get to know each other better. It is nothing to worry yourself over now, but do keep this in mind.
âBoysâremember to keep following all of your tutorsâ instructions, and please refrain from making yourselves bothersome. You all are guests, and the King and Queen of Eupheme are being very honorable by hosting you this summer.
âWe all send our best regards.â
That night, Doyoung tries his best to fall asleep but is kept awake by the contents of the letter. Itâs hard to tear his mind away from what will happen once he returns to Ceres. Though heâd thought heâd be prepared for this, he feels unexpectedly nervous and averse to the idea of yet again courting someone he barely knows for monthsâand quite possibly marrying them this time around. He doesnât know how much longer their parentsâ patience in allowing him to take his time with finding a partner will last.
Itâs proper. Itâs tradition. Itâs whatâs expected of him and his brothers, and heâs been primed for this duty his entire life. Yet, that knowledge does nothing to quell the uncomfortable sensationâdare he call it dread?âcreeping upon him.
He watches the clock on the mantle across his bedroom, just above the fireplace. Its little black hands tick by endlessly, counting down the seconds, minutes, hours. When another hour passes and heâs still staring at the clock, Doyoung peels the covers back and decides to leave the castle for a bit. He already knows of a few tucked-away passages he can slip out of that lead to the outside in some way or another, having bribed Jaemin into telling him where they are in case any of his brothers tries to sneak out. How ironic that heâs now using that knowledge for his own gains.
Although heâs not sure if heâll need it, Doyoung throws on a cloak for good measure before escaping to the outside. He spends a while walking through the castleâs extensive gardens and making sure heâs staying out of sight of the guards, though he feels no sleepier than he did when he first got there. Exasperated, heâs about to turn around and head back for the indoors when the woods beyond Arthenia pop into his mind.
Should he? Heâs already outside; whatâs the harm in it? Admittedly, the answer is a lot if heâs caught, but he pushes those thoughts away, as his feet are already turning to lead him away from the castle grounds. Doyoung decides heâll use his glamor for a bit to disguise his face and elven ears once he gets to Arthenia, though there probably wonât be many people awake at this time of night.
Without a horse, the walk to the forest is long. Doyoung doesnât create any of his light orbs until heâs sure heâs far enough away from the castle to not be spotted by any of the night watch guards. When he thinks itâs safe, he conjures a small ball of burning blue light in his palm, which is enough to illuminate his footsteps.
Doyoungâs boots are wet from the damp grass by the time he reaches the Market Square, and he passes by the rows of houses and outbuildings without a sound. Some lights are still on in some homes, glowing a warm yellow in the dim light of the half moon, while others are pitch black and fade into the surrounding darkness.
The forest looks even more intimidating at night, even with the limited light. He hesitates at the forest entrance for a minute, wondering if itâs safe to go inside. Heâs yet to see anything truly dangerous during the daylight hours, but things can be different at night. He didnât think to possibly bring his bow and arrow from their archery lessons, and there will be no easy escape on horse if something menacing crosses his path. Shaking his head and sighing, he enters anyway and prays to whatever goddess will listen for the best. Heâs already walked this far.
Doyoung convinces himself that heâs just going to walk around for a bit, maybe sit at the lake for a while, but after turning in a wide, looping circle, his feet eventually end up leading him to the oak tree. You are already sitting on a low branch when he arrives, as if waiting for his appearance. He notices youâre wearing the moonstone he once left in the tree hollow; somehow itâs been fashioned into a necklace, and he wonders where you got the tools to do that. One of your legs trails off the tree branch youâre perched on, swinging leisurely in the cool night air, and he tries not to stare.
âY/N,â slips from his lips. âYouâre awake at this hour?â
You smirk. âSo are you.â Doyoung moves the cloakâs hood away from his face with this free hand, and you study the glowing orb in his other hand. âYouâre a Light User...thatâs interesting.â
âI guess it could make for a fun trick at a ball,â he says, and tosses the glowing orb up into the air. He does this a few times until he throws it up one last time and it hovers in the air, as if stuck by an invisible force. Doyoung manipulates the orb with his fingers in a way that causes it to split up into a dozen more bright glowing spheres, all suspended in the air. By now, the entire area around the oak tree is lit up from the light emanating from these numerous orbs.
You laugh softly at this display, reaching out to touch the orb nearest to you and discovering that, despite your hand passing through it, the air still feels oddly warm in the spot where the light glows. âVery pretty. Itâs peculiar to see you at this hour, though. Are you even allowed to be out this late?â you ask, your eyes still lingering on the orb.
âNo, butâŠâ Doyoung trails off, unsure if he wants to revive that concern. âI couldnât sleep.â
You finally look back at him, and your face creases slightly. âWhatâs wrong?â
âI donât know,â Doyoung says, and he doesnât know, really. Getting married was always a part of the plan, as royalty. So why is he doubting it now? Maybe he knows more about why heâs feeling this way than heâll admit to, but there are things heâs still not even sure of himself at the moment.
You decide not to press the matter for now, especially after seeing his conflicted face. âYou donât have your horse. Was it a long walk?â
He nods and laughs a little, thinking maybe it was a bit ridiculous to walk all the way here in the middle of the night. He still has to walk all the way back, which isnât an appealing thought. âNothing like a bit of exercise to tire you out, I guess. Hopefully Iâll sleep better after.â
âYou sound like a troubled sleeper. I eat jasmine petals if I have trouble sleeping. You know, thereâs a bush of them around here.â Itâs an offer for him to partake, if he wants to.
âMy mom likes jasmine tea,â Doyoung says, grinning slightly. âDo you often have trouble falling asleep? I would think it would be easier being surrounded by nature like this.â
You slide off the lower branch and land on the grass with a soft thump. âNot alwaysâŠbut Iâd rather have an easy remedy than be left without one when I needed it.â Then you move to follow a dirt path leading away from the tree, but not before turning back to look at Doyoung. âCome on, then. Iâll show you the bush.â
Once again, he hesitates like he did just before entering the forest. âIs...it safe?â
You squint at him. âSafe?â
âI meanâŠthere must be other creatures in this forest besides the agreeable woodland variety.â
âYesâŠbut they mostly live on the far outskirts. And either way, none of the other inhabitants will hurt a dryad. Weâre the forestâs keepers. So youâll be safe if youâre with me.â
Doyoung decides to take your word for it and follows you along the path, his blue orbs trailing after him. He sends some further ahead to light the narrow path so you both can see better, though you already know where the bush is by heart.
Soon, youâre both standing in front of the aforementioned bush, which is laden with white jasmine blooms. They seem to shine unnaturally brightly under the illumination of the blue orbs.
âTake some,â you say, carefully plucking one of the flowers from the bush. You hold it up to his nose so he can smell it, and he does so. The scent envelops him like a warm hug, and if he didnât know any better, heâd say itâs already making him feel better. When you hold the flower out to him, he takes it gingerly. He doesnât fail to notice the soft blossomâs texture, or the equal softness of your hand.
âWill your friends be okay with this?â Doyoung asks tentatively, holding the flower in his hand with a certain fragility.
âThey will. And if they aren't, it can be our secret.â There are no secrets in this forest, really, but you humor him anyway, wanting to do something nice in return for the gifts heâs given you.
Doyoung nods and takes a couple more of the flowers, their leaves included, for the tea. He tucks them safely in the pocket of his pants.
You smile at him once heâs taken what he wants. âYouâre quite gentle,â you remark. Doyoung doesnât expect to hear that from you, and he looks at you quizzically.
âWhat do you mean?â
âYou just appear to be very...cognizant. Many people whoâve come to the forest before donât give any thought to disturbing the natural balance of things and taking what they want. Not the villagers, but others.â
âI see,â Doyoung nods, feeling his face grow warm. Heâs never had that particular attribute associated with him before. Gentle. Men are meant to be strong and brave and fearless; gentleness is for the fairer sex. He doesnât dislike it, though. Quite the opposite, in fact.
You nod in return. âWell, itâs getting a bit late...later than it already is, anyway. I donât know how things at your castle work, but you may want to be getting back before someone notices youâre gone. The sun will be rising soon enough.â
Doyoung smiles slightly. âYouâre quite right.â
âWould you like me to walk back with you? To keep you safe, you know.â You giggle at this. âI will only go as far as the edge of the forest. But you should be alright beyond that point.â
âThatâs fine with me.â Doyoung canât help but feel a little embarrassed about being on the receiving end of such niceties, thinking that this is the kind of thing heâd be doing for you in any other context. Heâs not going to pass up the offer of safety, thoughâand the opportunity to spend a few more minutes in your company.
You talk in low voices on the way back towards the forestâs opening. Mostly about things in the forest, though Doyoung does mention his brothers once or twice. Secretly, you think itâs a bit endearing how much he cares about them even if they get on his nerves.
âWeâre here,â you say once youâre in view of the village again.
âThank you for walking with me. And thank you for the jasmine.â Doyoung pats his pocket.
You grin and wave. âYouâre welcome. Sleep well.â
Doyoung starts walking off but suddenly turns back to you as if thereâs something more he wants to say. You raise your eyebrows in question, waiting for him to speak, but after a second, he only smilesâif a bit nervouslyâand returns your wave.
You shuffle back into the underbrush a bit, though you stay there and watch him walk away until heâs just a speck amongst the backdrop of the village.
Doyoung makes it back home undetected and climbs back into bed feeling tired enough to sleep now, though he also attributes some of his sleepiness to the pleasant smell of jasmine still clinging to him.
When he slumbers, he dreams of a soft hand touching his, ripe with the scent of jasmine flowers.
The days get progressively hotter as the summer months settle in. With their tutorsâ increasing lenience thanks to them taking well to their educational and etiquette lessons, the men get more time to themselves to do whatever they wish. The heat encourages them to spend more time outdoors, whether itâs running through the castleâs expansive yards, shooting arrows at targets or some poor stuffed mannequins, or heading to the villageâand subsequently, the forest.
One hot day when they have little responsibilities to tend to, Jungwoo comes up with the brilliant idea to head to the lake for a couple hours, perhaps to cool down from the heat by wading in the water for a while. Sicheng, who has grown a bit disenchanted with the forest, decides to spend the day with their three cousins instead.
However, when the men get within shouting distance of the lake, they realize itâs already occupied.
âWait!â Mark hisses, pulling on the reins of his horse to make it stop. He holds a finger to his lips, and before any of the men can question him, the sound of shouting, laughter, and water splashing drifts to them on the wind. It appears they arenât the only ones whoâve had the idea of visiting the lake today.
âOh?â Donghyuckâs eyes widen, and he and Jungwoo waste no time with getting off their own steeds to head for the riverbank.
âWait, where the hell are you leaving off to?â Doyoung whisper-shouts, but the two pay him no mind as they creep over to a cluster of bushes near the edge of the lake. The shrubs are big enough to conceal them while still providing a few gaps to peek through, and from their new post they spot the dryads farther down the length of the lake, standing in a shallow portion. The women arenât near enough to spot the men hiding in the bush, but they are still close enough to see clearly from this distance.
âW-what do you see?â Mark asks, his body poised as if he wants to get off his horse and join them too, but heâs still unsure.
âYouâve got to see it for yourself,â Donghyuck snickers, waving the older man over.
Mark looks to Doyoung. Doyoung gives him an incredulous look, and Mark shoots an apologetic one back before dismounting his horse and going over to join his brothers, squeezing in-between them as they crouch on the ground. He sees a group of six dryads playing in the lake, splashing each other with the water. Two more sit on the bank observing the festivities and talking about something theyâre holding in their hands, though Mark canât quite make out what the small objects are.
Donghyuck has only barely seen you during the times heâs gone with Doyoung to deliver your gifts, though he instantly recognizes you as one of the girls standing in the lake. His breath catches a bit as he watches you with water glistening off your skin and your dress clinging to your body.
âIsnât this a little distasteful?â Mark mutters, his big eyes darting nervously between his brothers. He shifts uncomfortably, looking like heâs ready to make a run for it if need be. âI mean, watching them through the bushes like thisâŠâ
âProbably,â Jungwoo replies. âBut as long as they donât notice usâŠâ
Mark almost shouts at feeling a hand come down on his shoulder, and Donghyuck whips his head around when the same happens to him; however, itâs only Doyoung. âYou all need to get up right now,â he hisses lowly. âHavenât you learned anything over the past few months? This is inappropriateââ
âWhy are you standing?! Get down before theyââ
Before any of them can realize whatâs happening, what must be a gallon of lake water splashes down on all four of their heads. Screams of shock ring through the forest, along with a loud round of laughterâcoming from both above them and further down the lake.
Mark, Jungwoo, and Donghyuck get to their feet in a rush, looking and feeling very much embarrassed. They look up toward the treetops and see two dryads sitting in the cleft of some of the sturdier branches, openly giggling at them. Jungwoo notices they arenât holding buckets or any other objects that couldâve explained how they got the water up there in the first placeâjust a net woven with leaves, which he is certain they couldnât have been transporting the water in. And yet⊠âHow did you...?â
The women arenât interested in answering his question, though, and instead disappear into the branches, leaving nothing but a few stray leaves fallen to the ground.
âI think we probably deserved that,â Mark says, sighing and trying to shake some of the water out of his clothes. The rest of the dryads who are still in the water follow the lead of the other two girls, running out of the lake and scattering through the forest, the echoes of their laughter the only evidence that they were ever there. The only ones who stay are you and the two other tree nymphs sitting on the riverbank. Now that everyone is in full view of each other, Mark belatedly realizes that the âobjectsâ the two girls were holding and cooing over are not objects at all, but small sprites.
You step a little closer to the group of men, and the other two girls watch them intently. âIf you wanted to play with us, you could just say so. It would benefit you not to be a bunch of cads about it.â You roll your eyes, though you are somewhat amused by seeing them standing there looking soaked and embarrassed.
âO-of course! I tried to tell them, but you know how it is with these kids...we were just leaving, actually.â Doyoung grips Donghyuck and Jungwooâs collars like heâs about to drag them off like two misbehaving children, and Donghyuckâs face flushes at being treated like a kid in front of you.
âAre you sure about that?â you ask, and Doyoung raises his eyebrows at your question. You lower your hand into the lake water as if youâre only checking its temperature or letting it flow through your fingersâwhich is why theyâre taken off guard when you draw your hand back and send a big splash of water flying in their direction.
Donghyuck is the first to react, pulling away from Doyoungâs grasp and rushing into the water to splash you back. Itâs not long before things quickly evolve into another splash battle, with the other boys wading into the lake to join. The other two girls give skeptical glances at first, but they eventually bid goodbye to their sprite friends and jump into the lake, too.
You all spend what feels like hours running through the water and splashing each other, and your two friends take more quickly to the men than you expected. When the hour for them to leave comes rolling around, you are all soaked but smiling.
âWeâre never going to hear the end of it,â Mark says, looking down at their wet clothes. Still, thereâs no concealing the bright and amused smile coloring his features.
Your two friends wave to the men and quickly slip off back to their trees, though you linger for a while longer as you watch them climb out of the lake and try to wring out their clothes. Doyoungâs the last one left standing in the water with you, and you turn to him.
âDid the flowers help?â you ask.
âThe flowâ? Oh, the flowers! They worked just as intended, thank youâŠâ Doyoung blushes a little at the memory. As the others head for their horses, Donghyuck hangs back a little to hear the conversation, wanting to be nosy and wondering what flowers youâre referring to.
âIâm glad to hear that,â you reply, smiling and feeling a little proud that your remedy workedâeven though you knew it would. âYou know, if you ever need anything else, you can just askâŠthere are a lot of resourceful things here. Itâs like living in an apothecary.â
âWell, Iâm interested if he isnât!â Haechan interjects.
You smirk lightly at him while Doyoung shoots him an irritated look. âSure. I suppose youâve taken interest in the forest itself and are no longer just looking for a pretty woman to mess around with?â
Donghyuck flushes at your words, and his smile falters a little at being called out on his earlier intentions. Beside him, Doyoung gloats internally, and he bites his lip to stop himself from laughing out loud. âUmâŠsorry about that.â
âItâs nothing new,â you say matter-of-factly. Then you turn to Doyoung. âAnywaysâŠdonât forget what I said. Iâve gotten used to seeing you around here, so...donât be a stranger.â You go to leave then, but not before turning back around once more. âAnd donât go snooping around. Youâre not as stealthy as you think.â
Donghyuck only nods, too embarrassed to respond and unable to justify himself. Both men watch as you walk away, likely back towards your tree. Doyoung turns to the younger man. âCome on, then. Letâs be heading back; maybe our clothes will dry out on the way there.â
After the lake incident, Donghyuck insists on using all his lesson breaks for the next couple of weeks to go with Doyoung whenever he travels to the forest to see you. Donghyuck becomes even more invested in this after knowing that Doyoung had already met you face-to-face after going to the forest by himself. The older man acquiesces, though deep down heâd like to spend more time with you aloneâespecially with managing to make these visits only once or twice a week. Still, seeing you with his little brother clinging to his side is better than not seeing you at all.
Donghyuck is talkative and lively and inquisitive in your presence, much more willing to learn new things from you than from even the highest-rated tutors in Eupheme. Doyoung finds that particularly ironic, though he doesnât remark on it. Instead, he listens intently along with Donghyuck as you tell him about the many different kinds of plants within the forest, including what purposes they serve. Doyoung is always reminded of the night you gave him those jasmine flowers, and even now, he stares at your hands as you point out different leaves and subtly wishes he could have any excuse to touch them again.
âThese berries are safe to eat, though they look very similar to poisonous Pokeweed berries. Thatâs why you want to be sure you can tell the difference between themâŠâ You place a few in your palm and hold them out for Donghyuck to see.
Donghyuckâwho looks at you like you know everything in the world. You know many things, but not everything; but youâll continue to let him look at you so admirably, because you find it endearing. He somewhat makes you think of what it might be like to have a younger brother or an amiable male friend. Someone to offer you a different perspective of the world external from the community of women youâve always lived in.
Could Doyoung be that male friend or curious brother, too? Maybe, but maybe not.
Whenever you turn and speak to Doyoung to keep him included in the conversation, you donât get that companionable feeling. Thereâs something much warmer there, something that makes you smile a little wider and causes more interesting facts to pop into your head. You enjoy telling him more about the forest, your home, and you somehow feel like youâd tell him anything he wants to know whenever he looks at you.
You like to see his smile, and the way his eyes grow smaller as he laughs or grins at something youâve said. You havenât felt this in a very long time, but if thereâs anything to compare it to, itâd be eating warm honey straight from the honeycomb, or breathing in a lungful of jasmine scent before drifting off to sleep.
You donât dwell on it for too long, simply wanting to experience the emotions as they are rather than spend too much time worrying over what they mean. NeverthelessâŠyour idea of Doyoung is quite different from a friend or brother, indeed.
Although it is a Saturday when Doyoung comes to visit you, the sky is a dark and restless contrast to the dayâs liveliness, the clouds looking heavy enough to drag down to Earth. He knows itâll likely rain soon, which means he should probably stay in the castle and keep dry, but he ventures out to see you anyway. Today is the first time in a while heâs been able to see you without Donghyuck by his side, so heâs taking the opportunity.
Youâre not in your tree when he comes. He thinks maybe he might go and look for you, but youâll know where he is faster than he could find you. It takes a few minutes, but as expected, you appear from the further reaches of the woodland, laughing to yourself and holding a ring of flowers. Thereâs a similar one on your head made up of purple and white blooms. Doyoung thinks you look something like an angel against the skyâs gloom, with a halo made of blossoms instead of light.
âYouâre here now? Itâs about to rain,â you say, though your tone shows youâre clearly happy to see him.
He shrugs. âI felt like getting some air...Iâm not concerned with a little water, as you probably already know.â I wanted to see you, is what heâd really like to say, but he doesnât want to jump the gun. You nod in understanding, then hold up the ring of flowers in your hand; it has a few blue ones reminiscent of Doyoungâs light orbs. You offer the flower crown up to him, and he bends so you can place it on his head.
âNow you look like a true prince,â you say, smiling in satisfaction at your masterpiece. âIâve never seen you with a crown until now. Thatâs a shame.â
âIt is a shame.â Doyoung brings a hand up to feel the petals of one of the flowers between his fingers, and he grins. âIâm quite handsome in one.â
âOh, my prince!â You start prancing around Doyoung and his horse like a fairy, or maybe like a young maiden at a fancy ball, brushing your hand along the animalâs shiny coat as you do. âItâs such an honor for you to grace our forest with your elegant visage.â You finally stop in front of him with a curtsy, though you have to take a moment to readjust your flower crown when it almost flies off at the sudden stop. âWhat can I have the pleasure of doing for you today?â
Though he laughs at your acting, heâs also a little awestruck for a moment, taken away by your cuteness and humor. Doyoung realizes thereâs an awkward silence settling between you as heâs yet to say anything, and he finally stutters out, âThere was something I...w-wanted to tell you.â
âWhat is it?â You come out of your curtsy and stand straight in front of him, all ears open for whatever heâs about to say.
âWell, itâsâŠâ Itâs a lot scarier to say what you want when youâre standing in front of someone and not just practicing in front of the vanity mirror. Doyoung is still piecing the words together when a few drops of rain hit his cheek. He doesnât think much of it at first, but the droplets become impossible to ignore when they suddenly come hammering down without pretense, as if the gods have given word for the heavensâ floodgates to open.
âCome on!â You start running and Doyoung has no choice but to follow, tugging his horse along with him. It doesnât take long for you to lead him to a small cave heâs never seen before. To his defense, thatâs likely because the opening of it is partially obscured by hanging vines and other vegetation. Itâs tall enough for someone of Doyoungâs height to stand in comfortably, which heâs relieved by. He doesnât consider himself to be one of the more uptight royals like many others he knows, but he also wouldnât be thrilled by the idea of sitting down in a cold, dirty cave in the rain. Even with your haste, though, youâre both quite wet by now.
Though the cave is spacious enough for you two, it becomes apparent that both of you and the horse wonât fit. Instead, Doyoung guides the animal to take shelter nearby under a willow tree with overhanging branches.
The cave is not very deep at all, only extending a few feet backwards. Perhaps thatâs reassuring, at least for Doyoung, because there wonât be any disgruntled animals popping out to protest against their space being invaded.
âWell, that was interesting.â You chuckle as you squeeze water out of the hem of your dress.
âSuppose I canât say I didnât see it coming.â Doyoung does the same for the ends of his hair, though he knows it will be a while before it gets acceptably dry.
You laugh and nod. âYou said you wanted to tell me something. What was it?â you ask.
Doyoung pauses and looks at you carefully, with rainwater dripping off his chin and darkening his clothes. He looks very serious, which is something you havenât really seen before. It makes concern rise in your stomach, thinking maybe he has some bad news to deliver.
However, youâve mistaken the intensity in his eyes for somberness when itâs something else entirely.
âI...love you.â
You regard him with wide eyes, feeling a little taken aback. The rain pours noisily in the background, but youâve heard him loud and clear.
âI know we have only known each other for a few months,â he continues, âbut I love you. I want to be with you.â
Youâre surprised that he feels this strongly about you already, but itâs also true that youâve felt yourself falling for him in the past few months, with his thoughtful gifts and kind smile and soft voice. You release a breath you didnât realize you were holding, lips parting minutely. He catches the small movement of your mouth, like he notices everything about youâwhether you acknowledged it before or not.
Doyoung takes your hand. Though his palm is wet from the rain, you donât care about that. âI think about you when Iâm not here in the forestâŠand when Iâm overseeing my brothersâ lessons. I dream about you when I sleep at night. Every time I get another gift for you, itâs because I want to see you smile so brightly like that again, because of me. I never want to know a day without you.â
You know Eupheme isnât his home, that he has to leave someday. You know elves don't generally think kindly of dryads, viewing you all as frivolous and foolish and loose; and even if him and his brothers donât, thereâs no telling what the rest of his family thinks. You also know that even without those two things standing in the way, heâs still a prince whoâll need to be married to a suitable bride at some point. All of those things make you nervous. There are many obstacles before you, but you allow yourself to forget them momentarily as you stand in this cave with him.
You bring Doyoungâs hand up to your lips and kiss his knuckles softly, taking what warmth you can despite his cool skin. You hold his hand tightly, like it might be taken away from you otherwise. âDoyoungâŠyou have charmed me unlike anyone else.â
You bring that hand closer and place it over your racing heart, and he seems a bit hesitant at first because of the proximity to your breast, but he doesnât move. Instead, he readily responds to the kiss you give him afterwards, drinking in your warmth as a balm for the sudden cool air. For a while, thereâs only the sound of rain coming down and your lips connecting with each otherâs.
You donât know how long you kiss each other, but thereâs nothing else you can do in this small cave, so you continue without thought to the outside circumstances. Even after your lips part, you huddle close together. You close your eyes in Doyoungâs embrace, listening to the sound of his heartbeat and breathing underneath your ears and basking in the fullness of your own heart.
When the rain finally stops, Doyoung has to leave. The sun will be setting soon; the downpour went on longer than either of you anticipated.
âI promise Iâll come back soon,â he says, clinging to your hand with both of his.
âYou always do.â You already trust him more than you can say.
Doyoung nods to your words, smiling somewhat bashfully. He steps out of the cave and lets your hand slip from his. But before he can get more than a few feet away, he turns around and comes back to kiss you once more on the lips, his fingertips on your face like he canât believe youâre real.
You laugh once you separate from each other. âThe sunâs getting low, and the others will question you. Go on now.â
Doyoung keeps to his word and makes his way out after fetching his horse, but he keeps glancing back to you until heâs completely disappeared among the brush.
You feel like your mind has been filled with soft moss, all airy and soft and tangled together with unending thoughts. You walk back to your tree feeling as if you could float there instead, enjoying the damp grass under your feet.
The time slips by blissfully.
Doyoung keeps coming out to see you during his free time each week, as he has done since heâs been in Eupheme, though sometimes heâs able to manage more than just one or two visits. On those weeks when he comes out more often, whether it be at night or during the day, you hold him especially tightly, enjoying the extra time with him and wanting to live inside of itâto freeze a moment in time and keep it close to your chest for as long as possible.
âI wish you could see the castle,â Doyoung says this low and close to your ear like heâs telling you a secret. He lies on his side beside you in the grass, playing with your fingers. A gap in the treetops lets a lopsided circle of sunlight shine down on your faces, warming you both from the inside out. âWalk through the maze of land...or see the stable.â
You hum softly. âHmm...Iâm sure itâs nice.â Doyoung laughs, knowing youâre not interested in any place else other than your forest; you canât hide the neutral note in your tone, though he knows it isnât towards him.
âOr I could live out here with you.â He strokes the pad of his thumb along the length of your ring finger, and you donât fail to notice this.
You turn to him, full on grinning now. âI thought you said youâd never want to be tied to one place. Remember?â
Doyoung grins sheepishly along with you. âMaybe I changed my mind.â
âMmm, how indecisive you areâŠif you stay with me here, you canât ever leave.â You pluck a tiny blue flower from the ground and brush it against his lips, tracing the shape of his cupidâs bow with it. âMake your choice wisely.â
Doyoung purses his lips against the small flower, as if giving it a kiss, and does the same with your fingers as they ghost across his mouth. âIâve chosen already, princess.â
You lean in to kiss him, and he meets you halfway. The little blue flower slips from your hand. You donât know if there could ever be a more perfect moment, kissing him like this with the warmth of the sun on your back and your ears full of the sounds of birds chirping and insects purringâand, in the very distance, the lake water running.
You donât get to bask in the moment for too long, though, before something is interrupting you; and itâs not one of the other women like you mightâve expected.
Thereâs a rustling and a crash in the bushes, and you whip your head towards the noise, but itâs only a deerâor maybe some other creatureârunning off. You catch a few glimpses of its brown coat before it becomes obscured by the leaves. You still keep your gaze turned towards the bushes. Though there is nothing else there, you still get the odd sensation of being watched, the hairs on the back of your neck standing up.
âWhatâs wrong?â Doyoung whispers, his index finger touching your cheek. He glances at the source of the noise, but his eyes stay mostly focused on you.
âI know itâs odd, butâŠhave you ever felt like you were being watched? Even though nothingâs there?â you ask slowly.  âIâveâŠsort of felt like this a few other times when we were together.â
Doyoung looks suspicious for a moment, though he eventually shakes his head. âNo, I...not really.â He sits up to look at the same space youâre staring at, but he doesnât see anything more than you do. âIf someone else were out here besides the other dryads and the animals, wouldnât you already know?â
âI suppose that is true,â you say, though you still look towards the bush, trying to see if thereâs something youâre somehow not spotting. The sense that you have a pair of eyes at your back still doesnât go away, even when Doyoung finally pulls you away from the spot to walk further into the woods.
In the middle of August, the Archduke of Eupheme holds a ball. He has been renown for his exorbitant parties for many years, and although he couches this party in the excuse of making the Crown Prince and his brothers feel a bit more at home in the kingdom, everyone knows itâs really just a reason to get drunk and have some fun. No one would dare complain, though; after all, whoâd pass up the chance to attend? To rub elbows with handsome men and women and forget more pressing worries for a while?
The King and Queen of Eupheme see it as a good way for the young men to show off their newly acquired social etiquette theyâve been sharpening during their lessonsâand possibly mingle with noble women. Similarly, none of the brothers will object to the latter idea. Except for maybe Doyoung.
âCheer up! Iâve never seen you look so unsettled when going to a party,â Jungwoo says, pinching Doyoungâs cheek. Theyâre all loaded into their separate stagecoaches, with Jungwoo, Doyoung, Jaemin, and Mark in one and the other boys inside another behind them.
âIâm fine,â Doyoung insists, waving away the concern and plastering a hesitant smile on his face. He can already guess whatâs in store for tonight.
The ride to the Archdukeâs place is shorter than Doyoung expected. Itâs been a long time since they last visited the Archdukeâs mansion, and he swears he remembers the journey being longer than this. He sucks in a deep breath as he steps out of the stagecoach. The mansion looms large up ahead, obviously not quite as big as the King and Queenâs castle, but extravagant enough to be of note. Its stone interior glows with rows of brightly burning torches decorating either side of its grand entryway.
The Archdukeâs large ballroom is filled to the brim with high-ranking officials and other nobility, with everyone mingling together in a big glittering clump of bodies and puffy dresses and long hair. Thereâs no other race but elves there, which is usually expected at royal balls like these; other species are often relegated to roles of servant, cleaner, waiter, and so on.
Thereâs a notable stir when the King and Queen and the eight men enter, and the room parts down the middle to make room for them.
The men wave and smile and mingle like theyâve been taught to, though some revel in it a bit more than others. Theyâre quickly embraced by the crowd, and the Archduke and Archduchess come to greet them. A young woman walks slightly behind them, her brown hair pinned up in an elaborate updo, wisps of hair clinging around her elven ears. Doyoung remembers her as their daughter and only child, who was never allowed to play in the yard with them as children because âsuch rowdy behavior wasnât fitting for a lady of her sensibilities,â as her mother used to say.
âIâm sure you all remember Eunomia,â the Archduke says, encouraging the young woman to come to the front. The brothers all nod in acknowledgement, answering her curtsy with their own bows.
âYouâve grown even prettier since we were young,â Jungwoo says, smiling politely. The girl smiles timidly back to him.
âThank you. Youâve become quite handsome yourself.â
âWeâre so glad that we could be graced with the presence of the Crown Prince of Ceres tonight,â the Archduke continues. âWeâve all been looking forward to your appearance since we got word of your family visiting Eupheme. The timing, especially, is quite extraordinary, as weâve been vetting possible suitors for our Eunomia.â Itâs everything just short of an actual proposition to marry his daughter, and Doyoungâs lips twitch as a thousand different thoughts flit through his mind.
Doyoung bows his head slightly in acknowledgement of their statement and schools his expression into something neutral and amiable. âExtraordinary timing, indeed.â
Itâs not long before the music is rising to a grand swell again. The other boys part ways to search for dance partners in the crowd, and Doyoung already knows whatâs expected of him. He holds his hand out to Eunomia. âWould you like to dance?â
She nods and takes his hand. Doyoung leads her onto the main dancefloor beside a few other individuals who have already coupled up. A relatively fast tune carries their feet across the floor like the wind.
Eunomia is pretty, nice, and quiet. Sheâs too shy to meet Doyoungâs eyes directlyâno doubt as a result of her parentsâ trainingâand she lets him lead the conversation the same way he leads their dance. She would make the perfect wife to any other man but him.
Doyoung might have been more willing to pursue something with her if this gathering had happened a year before or even a few months ago, before their visit to Eupheme. Now, he only feels uninterested at bestâand burdened at worstâabout it all. Heâs uncomfortable with the way her hand sweats in his palm, and with how fragile she feels in his hold. His mind keeps drifting back to the forest, though he tries to be present in the here and now.
The next few dances go similarly. Though his brothers and cousins seem to be enjoying themselves with the number of pretty women they have at their behest, Doyoung doesnât feel the same. He ends up approached by various noblemen throughout the night, all holding some prestigious rank or another and seeking to introduce him to their daughters and insinuate a dance. And of course, being the gentleman and prince he is, how can he say no?
Each of the women is unique in their own way, but still not quite enough to hold his attention for long. Heâs already made his mind up about who he wants, though you canât be with him here nowâor anywhere but the forest, really. This knowledge is equal parts comforting and disagreeable. He finally has an answer to the question about whether heâd ever find someone to love, though it turns out he cannot even be with you in an easy, convenient way.
By the time the night ends and the royals are on their way back to the castle, Doyoung is rather tightly wound. His mind swarms with thoughts of everything that occurred earlier in the evening and how annoyed and restless it all made him. Increasingly, heâs beginning to feel like heâs up against a wall that he just canât surmount. He almost yearns for the days when he unquestioningly accepted his duty and actually received some enjoyment from his courtships, but heâd never truly want to go back. Not if it meant not knowing you.
âAre you okay? You seem upset,â Mark says hesitantly, noticing Doyoungâs tensed jaw as he keeps his face turned towards the window, looking out at the nightscape. Doyoung only gives his brother a quick glance before nodding curtly.
âIâm quite alright.â Itâs a lie, but Doyoung doesnât feel like trying to explain his mood at the moment. Though itâs easy enough for them to guess why Doyoungâs visits to the forest have been so much more frequent over the past month or soâand subsequently, why his mood is so sour nowâit remains an open secret.
Jaemin settles back in his cushioned seat, grinning slightly to himself before looking up at Doyoung. âYour name must be on many a ladyâs dance card tonight, Doyoung. I suspect every woman at the party had a turn, if not the Archduchess herself.â Mark elbows him in the side, but the younger man doesnât think anything of it.
âI suppose so.â Doyoung rubs his finger over his lower lip. âBut maybe you should be more concerned that the competition is diminishing your chances.â Mark and Jungwoo chuckle at that.
âNot to worry. When the time comes, the only choice theyâll have is me.â The younger two laugh even more enthusiastically, and Doyoung only shakes his head, grinning slightly despite himself.
 Once everyone is settled in for the night, Doyoung waits in his bed for an hour to be safe and then decides to sneak out to see you. Once again, he doesnât bother with visiting the stable to take the horse, nor does he try to make himself look âpresentable,â tired of being princely for the night. The only thing he does is pull on his pants and shoes and button up his shirt halfway before losing his patience and yanking his cloak on.
He uses his glamor to momentarily disguise himself as he passes through Arthenia, though the few stragglers outside donât pay him much mind.
âY/N?â Doyoung calls out your name, slipping his cloak to the ground once he gets to your familiar oak tree. He soon hears and sees the fluttering of tree leaves as you descend from the canopy and touch the ground, alighting from the branches as gracefully as if youâve been doing it your entire lifeâwhich you have.
âMy, sir. Here at this hour again? What could bââ You donât get to finish your sentence before Doyoung is gathering you up in his arms and kissing you hard, his forearms wrapped tight around your waist. He picks you up off the ground and you let yourself be lifted, toes barely grazing the grass.
Itâs a long moment before you can regain your breath. You look at him incredulously as he sets you back on the grass, pressing his forehead to yours.
âWhat...whatâs got you in such a state?â
âLove,â he mumbles, pressing another kiss to your lips. You laugh at that, holding his flushed face in your hands.
âItâs a pleasant thing, isnât it? But really, what is it? You seem tense.â
âI am tense,â Doyoung says, though he keeps his lips close to yours. Heâs not really in the mood to go into detail about the evening and disturb whatâs currently unfolding between you. âItâs just...royal niceties. They can become quite tiring.â
âThatâs a pity,â you reply, though you pause in your next thought when his lips find your jawline and press against it firmly. This is the most intimate contact youâve had since you met, or since he confessed to you, and it ignites a burning flame in your chest. âMaybe there is something that can help you with that.â
Doyoung pulls back to look you in the eyes, wondering if youâre insinuating exactly what he thinks. You step away from him and tug on his hand, pulling him away from the tree. âIâll show you.â
You both walk along a section of the forest that Doyoung isnât familiar with, and he conjures some light orbs to illuminate the pathway. You spend a long time walkingâso long that heâs almost afraid he wonât be able to find his way back out. Or maybe heâll encounter one of those unfriendly creatures that you previously mentioned lives on the outskirts. Wherever youâre taking him is farther than heâs ventured before.
You finally stop when you get near the west edge of the forest. The trees are slightly sparser here, and thereâs a path through the middle that trails off onto the bottom of a steep hill. The hill marks the end of the forest and flattens out onto a field of tall grass. He catches glimpses of the grass swaying in the breeze under the moonlight and the light of his own orbs.
Thatâs far from the most eye-catching thing here, though. Another lake sits before you two, though itâs much smaller than the other oneâmore like a pondâand forms a nearly perfect circle.
You walk along the grassy bank and pull Doyoung along with you, and heâs surprised to feel heat coming from the water as he gets nearer to it. Itâs not a burning hotness, but a comfortable warmth.
âShall we swim?â You look at Doyoung over your shoulder, letting go of his hand to tug at one strap of your dress. He nods, watching wordlessly as you peel your dress off in front of him. His throat tightens to see youâre wearing nothing underneath. Standing nude underneath the combined glow of the moon and his own blue light makes you look positively ethereal, and Doyoung mentally imprints this image in his mind, filing it away as a permanent memory.
He watches as you step off the grassy bank and get into the pond, the black water lapping at your legs as you wade further into it. Heâs still standing and simply observing you as you turn around to look at him and lift your arms out of the water, like youâre asking for a hug. âAre you going to leave me all alone in here?â You give him your best pleading eyes, and it doesnât take long for him to strip his clothes off and come in after you.
He dips underneath the waterâs surface and swims around you, and you giggle as you can just barely make out his form under the water. You can only spot the ripples he leaves behind.
Doyoungâs head pops above the water on the farther side of the pond, with his long black hair sticking to his face and covering his shoulders. It makes his ears stand out more, and you laugh. You swim over to him and he pulls you into him when youâre close enough, your naked bodies molding themselves to each other. Youâre about to say something, but his lips quickly envelop yours and you forget any words you formerly had. You kiss for a while in the lakeâs warm water, with the full moon and Doyoungâs lights serving as your only illumination.
You havenât done much else but kiss so far, but you can still feel something hard and warm pressing into your stomach. Doyoungâs lips separate from yours to travel to your neck, pressing against your pulse point and softly sucking the skin there.
You pull away to look at him, your body feeling strangely light and hot all at the same time. âMaybe we should get out of the water,â you say, smiling coyly.
Doyoung nods and scoops you up, carrying you out of the lake and setting you down on the unnaturally soft grass surrounding the waters. It feels almost like a cotton blanket underneath you.
Youâre both fully exposed in front of each other now, though you donât really feel embarrassed about it. Doyoungâs hands are warm as he cups the sides of your face and nudges his nose against yours, teasing you momentarily with the promise of his lips before actually kissing you again.
You like feeling his hair underneath your palm, all wet and slick beneath your fingertips, and you run your fingers through the strands. They coil around his neck and shoulders like little snakes, or maybe vines on a climbing plant.
His member stands against his stomach, already leaking precum from the press of your lips and the warmth of your body against his. You reach out to touch him, tracing your fingertip against a vein and feeling the stickiness of the precum, and Doyoung sighs against your lips. His hands come to your inner thighs, pushing them a bit further apart so he can dip his fingers between them and feel you wet and warm for him.
You gasp sharply when he slides a finger into you. He reaches deeply inside you, his palm rubbing against your clit as he fingers you, and it makes you spread your legs wider and push your hips closer into his touch. You wrap your fingers around him, and you enjoy the pulse of his cock in your hand as you stroke him.
Doyoung soon slips another finger into you, stretching you out more for him, and you moan as he does. You press your mouth against the base of this throat and his collarbones, feeling the firmness of them as you lightly drag your teeth over them. As if by luck, he shifts his fingers a certain way and brushes against that sweet spot that has you leaning further into his body and moaning hotly against his neck.
âDoyoungâŠâ you sigh. He gives you an answering moan as your fingertips slide over his tip, purposely lingering at the slit. Your lips brush against each otherâs, not quite kissing but making some semblance of the motion. Despite how good youâre feeling now, with his hand working you up to an inescapable high, you decide you need to have more of him; you need to get as close as possible. âDoyoung, please.â
âWhat do you need?â he asks, his voice unbearably gentle and breathy in your ear.
âYou.â You take your hand away from him to guide his body on top of yours, parting your legs to invite him in-between. You are less preoccupied with foreplay at the moment and just want him inside you, which he has no complaints about.
The firm press of him inside you is unlike anything youâve felt in the recent past. Itâs not like dryads go their entire lives without sexual pleasureâof course, thereâs always self-pleasure and the company of other women, and even the occasional agreeable male visitor who comes into the forestâbut itâs been a long time since youâve experienced it delivered by another personâs body. Itâs almost strange, but also good and familiar, if only a little painful at first.
You try to breathe evenly as Doyoung seats himself inside you, his hands stroking you so adoringly that it makes you lose your bearings. Him leaning forward to kiss you only takes more of your breath.
âIs this good for you?â he asks quietly. Youâre not quite sure what part of it heâs referring toâhim inside you or his hands strumming along your breasts and clitâbut you nod enthusiastically. Everything heâs doing feels undeniably good. Just when you think it could not get any better, he pulls out a bit and starts thrusting into you. His pace is slow, allowing you to adjust, but itâs enough to make you cry out loud, gripping his slick shoulders for support.
Doyoung brings himself close to kiss your lips again, grinning against your mouth. âShhh, my princess. If youâre too loud, youâll wake all the others.â
You nod against his wet forehead, breathing heavily, though itâs a bit hard to keep yourself quiet as he fills your body over and over again. You press your thighs tight against his hips, feeling the muscles in his body flex as he thrusts into you. His movements create a slick sound between you, and the lewd quality of it entices you more.
While one of his hands slides slick and slow across your clit, you grasp the other and bring it up to your lips, kissing his fingers like you did the day he told you he loved you, and then nibbling on them, sucking them into your mouth. Doyoung twitches inside you when your mouth tightens around his fingers, and he groans into the night air. Youâre reluctant to let his hand go, but you do it so he can leverage himself enough to dip his head lower and give more attention to your breasts, drawing his tongue across the round firmness of them and catching your nipples in his mouth.
He angles himself a bit differently so he can find your spot again and concentrates on repeatedly pushing into that sensitive part of you. His attentions bring you to your climax soon, and you can barely quiet yourself as you come around him. The pleasure seems never-ending, like itâs pouring into you from a bottomless well, and small tears bead at the corners of your eyes. Doyoung cups your face and kisses your tears away, and you hold the back of his head as he does.
When Doyoung gets close, he slips himself from inside you and thrusts in between the tight space of your thighs, his tip rubbing across your stomach. He comes soon after doing this, his seed pooling on your skin, some of it running into the grass.
You both lie in the grass after the aftermath, with Doyoung pulling you so you can lay your body on top of his. His heartbeat is still fast; you hear it hammering in his chest as you rest your head against his breast. You close your eyes and let the sound of it calm your own restless body.
After a few long moments of listening to the insects and night creatures making their midnight songs, you stir from your position on his chest and draw yourself up. âDoyoungâŠâ you murmur, straddling either side of his waist so youâre hovering over him. You press your lips against his and he responds with a slow kiss. You can practically feel how satisfied he is as his lips push against yours, like a drunken sprite whoâs gotten into a cup of ale.
You depart from his lips and trail your mouth over the rest of his body until youâre level with his softened cock. It jumps a bit when you grasp it, and Doyoung groans softly; his voice increases slightly when you press your lips to it, still tasting the remnants of his salty release and your own pleasure. His hand comes to hold the back of your head as you take him into your mouth, licking the shaft and feeling his balls in your other hand.
Though he was the one whoâd hushed you earlier, now he has to choke back his own moans as you suck him and stroke your tongue around his tip.
You draw your mouth away from him, and a trail of spit follows your lips. âDoes this feel good, my prince?â you ask, still stroking him languidly to keep his pleasure stoked. You know it does, but you want to hear it from his mouth anyway.
âSo good.â He makes a noise between a whimper and a groan, and it travels straight to the apex of your thighs. His stomach tenses with his strained breaths as you take him back into your mouth, focusing your attention on the leaking slit.
His thighs tremble when he gets closer, and as much as youâd like to have him come in your mouth and drip over your chin, you decide to pull away and straddle your legs around his waist again. Doyoung whines needily, though his complaints are quickly forgotten when your sex slides over his slick shaft. He waits with bated breath as you grab the base of his member and line him up with your entrance, pushing him into you as you sink down on him. Feeling him part your walls makes your legs shake a little, and you readjust your posture so you can maintain your stability.
You seat yourself fully on top of Doyoung and let him press himself up into you as you push back down on him, your hands scraping for purchase on his chest. In this position, you can control the pace and ride him just so that his tip is pressing into your most sensitive spot.
Eventually, you lean forward with your mouth covering his. Another orgasm approaches you fast, and you pant against his lips as you search for that release again. âI love you,â you moan softly, trying to muffle your sounds with the touch of his lips.
Doyoungâs hands roam your body, coming up to palm your breasts and thumb at your nipples. âI adore you,â he whispers.
This time you both come within moments of each other, moaning into each otherâs mouths. Doyoung pushes himself into you until youâre leaking over him once more, and then he hurriedly pulls out and comes across your thigh, leaving trails of white dripping down your skin.
Doyoung knows heâll need to get up and get dressed at some pointâand begin the long trek back to the castleâbut he doesnât think about that right now. He just pulls you closer and enjoys the warm stickiness of your bodies together, the lukewarm breeze stirring his hair, and the gentle grass tickling his skin.
âYou donât seem like yourself lately.â
Jungwoo brings this up to Donghyuck during one of their archery lessons as they sit beside each other underneath the sun. The younger man was noticeably not as concentrated or effortless as heâd usually be, and many of his arrows ended up being off-mark, if not missing their targets entirely.
Currently, they both sit in the grass after their instructor called for a break earlier, stating that they needed some time to cool off and pull it togetherâDonghyuck in particular.
âIâm fine,â Donghyuck grumbles, sighing deeply and closing his eyes. If he could close his ears, too, he would. Unfortunately for him, his brother doesnât take that as a sign to stop talking.
âThatâs doubtful. Really, whatâs chafing you? I know all the lessons can be annoying, but there is nothing we can do about that for now.â The younger man doesnât answer at all this time, but Jungwoo continues on. âI know Doyoung isnât with us during our breaks as often as he was before, but isnât that a good thing? He canât tell us what to do all the time.â
Donghyuck groans, wiping his hands over his face at the mention of their older brother. Jungwoo perks up at this. âOh? Is it something with Doyoung thatâs bothering you? What is it?â
Donghyuck is quiet for a moment longer. When itâs clear Jungwoo wonât leave the matter alone, he turns to face his brother fully, looking at him more closely. He hesitates for a moment before finally saying, âWhat would you do if you wanted something you couldnât have?â
Jungwoo thinks for a moment. âI donât know. It depends on what it is. Maybe the logical answer would be to just give it up and stop indulging a fruitless case.â
Donghyuck sighs, hanging his head. âOf course. But what if...alright, what if it was a person? Someone youâre particularly fond of. AndâŠthey just make you feel as ifâŠif they looked at you once, you wouldnât hesitate to hand them anything they could ever want. Then would you give up on them so easily?â
Jungwooâs eyes widen, and Donghyuck thinks he mustâve said too much. Before he can speak to try to defuse the situation, Jungwoo says, âDonât tell me youâre still upset about Nayeon. Iâm sorry Donghyuck, butââ
âUgh,â Donghyuck pushes himself to his feet, taking up his bow and arrow again and walking off to one of the targets farther away from Jungwoo. âNevermind.â
After Donghyuck gives a few more unsuccessful tries, the instructor decides to dismiss them early and encourages Donghyuck to keep his head clear for their next session. âI am well aware of what youâre capable of, Donghyuck, and I know you understand your own abilities. Just look at it as simply having an off day, but do try to keep your concentration next time.â
âYes, sir,â he replies, already feeling drained even though theyâre only halfway through the day. The walk back to the castle with Jungwoo is quiet, though crossing the ample landscape gives him plenty of time to think to himself. What youâre capable of...Yes. What is he capable of?
Maybe there was still a way to alter the course.
âYouâre particularly quiet today,â you remark, studying Doyoungâs face. Youâre both sitting in the small clearing where you and the other dryads often gather at night, only itâs daytime now and the other girls are off doing their own things. Deeper among the woods, you can hear their laughter from a distance.
Doyoung came to visit you with a solemn look, and though you can tell he is still glad to see you, thereâs also a tinge of disquiet beneath it.
A strong gust blows some strands of hair into his face, and you brush them away before he can do it himself. He turns his head and stares at you as you do, his eyes big and imploring and brewing with a distress you canât place. âActually, you seem to be a bit different since...that night,â you continue. Your face warms at the thought of your first time together, and how Doyoung took you in the grass and whispered sweet adoration to you. âIs something wrong?â
Doyoungïżœïżœs lips part like he wants to speak, though he remains silent for a few moments more. Then he says something that nearly makes your heart stop, the words coming slow off his tongue. âI want to give up my title.â
âYour title? As Crown Prince? How can you do that?â
âI could do it,â he says, his voice still low. âThereâs no law against it. It might be...dishonorable. No, it would certainly not beâŠâ He pauses, then abandons whatever he was about to say. âBut thereâs no law to stop me.â
âBut why? I thought you liked being royalty, at least to some degree. Your station in life affords you many things others donât have.â
âIt doesnât afford me you.â He grasps your hand where it lies in the grass. âWe canât be together if Iâm still Crown Prince. If I walk away, though...â
Youâre also quiet now, unsure how to respond to a declaration like this. For Doyoung to give up his royal title for you...itâs a much bigger implication than you think heâs really considering.
âBut, the throne...youâre the heir, and it justâŠâ Youâre almost desperate to come up with at least 100 reasons why he canât do it, though you arenât sure why. Maybe youâre too afraid to hope it could be possible, even if itâs the slightest chance.
âI have six other brothers. Any one of them could...â Doyoung falters, remembering Yutaâs and Sichengâs controversial parentage, and then sighs but tries to remain hopeful. You look at him with wrinkled brows, worry crowding your heart. You sigh and rest your head on his shoulder, looping his arm with yours.
âI donât know if theyâd ever agree to it,â you say it almost inaudibly.
âThereâs no way to know if we donât tryâŠâ Doyoung replies, hugging you tightly to him. âI donât care about giving up my title.â
You shake your head. âThere are so many other things to consider, Doyoung.â
Doyoung knows youâre worried and doubtful, but he holds you close to him and kisses your temple and tries not to think about those things. He only wants to think about all the good things the future could hold for you.
A small grin appears on his face as he wills his mind to drift elsewhere. âHow many children would you like to have?â Doyoung asks suddenly. You give him an incredulous look, though there is a grin of your own slowly taking over your lips.
âI donât know. Maybe I donât want children.â You roll your eyes and laugh. âAs long as Iâve been on this Earth, Iâd have them by now if I wanted them.â
âThen itâd be just the two of us forever?â Doyoung pulls you so youâre both lying down and entangles himself with you, his head on your chest. He listens to your heart, a steady rhythm that lulls him into a sense of sleepiness. âThatâs fine with me.â
You feel a tug at your heart, like the chambers are contracting in pain. âYes, an eternity together.â
Despite your many doubts and questions, you have a warm dream that night. One of you and Doyoung living in the forest together, running through the hills, jumping across creeks, and enjoying each otherâs company to your heartâs content.
Donghyuck knocks on the door of the Kingâs sitting room, his palms sweating as he waits for a response. Sicheng stands beside him, quiet and waiting to see if the man will respond. The King of Eupheme may be a long-term friend of their fatherâs, but Donghyuck canât help the slight fear he feels whenever heâs in the manâs presence. Something about him has always been a little colder, more unforgiving, and more unyielding than their own father is.
âWho is it?â The manâs voice booms from behind the door.
âIt...itâs Donghyuck and Sicheng, Your Highness.â Donghyuckâs voice wavers a bit as he speaks, and he tries to suppress the tremors in his speech. âWeâre here for our...meeting.â
âCome in, then.â
Donghyuck turns the doorknob and enters the room, closing the heavy door behind him and his brother.
âWell, then. What is the pressing matter you have to inform me of?â The King raises one eyebrow, looking skeptical about whether Donghyuck has anything to report or not, though he waits patiently for the boyâs response.
The elven Kingâs presence seems impossibly heavier in this singular room, filling every corner of the space and physically weighing down the Earthâs gravity. Donghyuck almost doesnât know what to do with himself in response to this force. Sicheng is less affected by itâor better at hiding itâthough his face creases minutely. Donghyuck ends up speaking without thinking clearly about what he practiced prior.
âDâŠDoyoung is courting a dryad.â
âA...what, boy?â The King slowly leans forward, his sharp eyebrows drawing together, one hand coming up to stroke his long beard. They both know that he knows full well what a dryad is, but he seems unable to comprehend what Donghyuck has just blurted out. Or maybe he thinks the younger man is lying.
âA-a dryad, Your Highness. Heâs been using his assigned free timeâand sneaking out at nightâevery week to see her, in the forest beyond Arthenia. HâŠheâs even thinking of asking to be relieved from his title to be with her.â Donghyuck feels sweat gathering on the back of his neck, as if heâs the one about to be punished.
The Kingâs brows furrow even more, though this time his eyes hold a hint of rising anger. He leans back in his seat again, holding Donghyuck and Sicheng with a hard stare. âThese are quite damning claims to make. Where is your proof?â Before either one can respond, the King continues on. âHe will doubtless be questioned, but I would think that both of you have ample reason to try to sabotage the Crown Princeâespecially you.â He directs his gaze to Sicheng at this, and Sichengâs face falters. âA whoreâs son will always believe heâs owed more than heâs worth.â
Disgust and hatred rises up in Sichengâs chest at being regarded like thisâalways as less than his half-brothersâthough he tries not to let his rage show. His jaw clenches as he speaks, keeping his tone measured, and it takes him a long moment to force out a proper response. âWe indeed have proofâŠYour Highness.â
âIf youâll allow us, we need a mirror, Your Highness,â Donghyuck adds.
Still with a skeptical look on his face, the King waves his hand towards a small round mirror hanging on the east wall, sitting formerly unacknowledged despite all its ornate trappings. Sicheng walks over and takes it off the wall, coming back to stand in front of the King with it. Donghyuck comes up behind Sicheng and lays a hand on the back of the older manâs neck, pressing his index and middle finger where his brain stem would be. Donghyuck closes his eyes and concentrates, while Sicheng keeps his own eyes open, staring into the depths of the mirror and his own reflection.
In the mirror image, his eyes turn a foggy gray. Donghyuckâs memories flood into his mind as if they were his own, experienced with his own five senses; he can almost smell the forest grass and feel the sun burning his skin. Sicheng then takes his right hand and presses his fingertips against the mirror, forcing it to bend to his power and replicate what heâs seeing in his mindâs eye.
When the image becomes steady, Sicheng holds the mirror up to the King and lets him see what it displays; you and Doyoung lying in the grass together, with you dragging a tiny blue flower across his lips. Doyoung tilting his head up to accept your kiss. You looking straight ahead, trying to figure out why you sense a disturbance in the forest, only to see a deerâand missing the invisible form of Donghyuck staring at you and your lover from the bushes. Your conversation is hard to hear, consisting of mostly vague echoes, as if you were speaking underwaterâchanneling sounds is harder than conjuring up imagesâbut thereâs no need for words to understand whatâs going on.
The Kingâs eyes are a windstorm of emotions at this point, a close rival to the actual stormy gray of Sichengâs eyes as he reveals the memory. He is silent for an excruciatingly long moment. Still, he continually strokes his beard in a repetitive motion, though his gaze displays the true anger burning beneath the surface.
âAnd where is Doyoung right now?â he finally asks, after it seems like an eon has passed. Then he waves his hand sharply towards the mirror. âIâve seen enough of that.â
âHe has no duties to attend to as of right now, so he mustâve gone to the forest,â Sicheng responds. Donghyuck takes his hand away from his neck then, stepping back in a jerky motion as he tries to regain some of the energy spent from transferring the memory. Likewise, the mirror image fades once Sicheng takes his hand away from the glass, and the normal brown of his irises bleeds back into his eyes. âTo see her again, no doubt.â
The King nods, pressing his fingers together into a steeple, his thick rings glinting in the light of the room. âJust as you say, the matter is quite grave. The King and Queen of Ceres will have to be notified immediately...and it will be handled accordingly.â
Donghyuck and Sicheng nod to the Kingâs statement, shooting each other looks out of the corners of their eyes. Donghyuck feels a small sense of triumph at knowing his brother will likely be sent back to Ceres soonâor at least, forbidden to see you anymoreâeven if he knows deep within that he shouldnât be reveling in Doyoungâs impending heartbreak like this.
âUnfortunately, it also cannot be forgotten that you two, and all your other brothers, withheld this information for months.â The King blinks slowly. âI must also assume that my sons have been swept up in concealing this utter nonsense, to some degree. Those transgressions will be dealt with accordingly as well.â He draws the last sentence out to emphasize his claim, though the men have already heard him clearly. The tiny smirks they allowed themselves to show quickly fade.
Donghyuck feels as if heâs just had a bucket of cold water poured down his back, and Sichengâs fists curl tightly around the mirror.
Donghyuck is the first to respond, bowing his head. âA-as necessary, Your Highness.â Sicheng lowers his own head after the younger does, though with noticeable reluctance.
The King waves his hand as a signal for the two men to leave, though he still looks thoughtful for reasons neither of them could guess. âYou are both dismissed.â
Sicheng is fuming once they leave the sitting room, though Donghyuckâs anxiety manifests itself as tense silence, which is a true rarity for him.
âLook what your impulsiveness has gotten us into this time,â Sicheng gripes once theyâre far enough away to not be heard. Donghyuck reawakens at that and shoots his brother daggers with his gaze.
âI didnât think weâd get punished, too! And if you thought it was such a bad idea, you shouldâve never agreed to it!â
Sicheng shakes his head, scoffing. âItâs neither here nor there anymore. Whatever comes of this had better be worth it.â
âYouâd better hope,â Donghyuck continues. âLike we donât know youâd sell us all out to have Yuta, your favorite brother, as the Crown Prince instead of Doyoung.â
Sicheng whips back around to Donghyuck. âIâd think heâd deserve it more than any of you ingrates whoâve had everything handed to you. You could never even imagine what itâs like to have to fight and scrape for an iota of respect among your own family.â
Donghyuck wants to scream something childish and hurtful back at him, but heâs lost on what to say. They all know Sicheng and Yuta have always been a bit separate from the rest of them despite their best efforts to make them feel included, but he hadnât realized Sicheng felt quite this forsaken. The Kingâs earlier words certainly donât help. Donghyuck has enough conscience left to feel guilty, though he refuses to acknowledge that aloud now.
When Sicheng sees that Donghyuck doesnât have a response, he nods in vindication and stomps off.
After Doyoung returns to the castle that afternoon, the atmosphere in the castle is notably more tense. Itâs as if storm clouds have gathered in the rafters, waiting for the perfect time to rain down hell. He senses this acutely, though he canât quite understand the reasoning for it.
Donghyuck is uncharacteristically quiet today, and Sicheng is similarly reserved. Jeno, Jisung, and Jaemin conduct their business as usual, though there is a certain stiffness to their auras; the kind of careful and cautious demeanor you learn to adopt when living under the constant presence of a ticking timebomb. Mark and Jungwoo, who accompanied Doyoung on his visit to Arthenia and the forest, remain just as clueless as him about whatâs wrong, though they also feel uncomfortable underneath the weight of the tension.
The air stays this way for hours, including during their nightly dinner. The Queen and King donât do or say anything out of the ordinary, though Doyoung can feel the Kingâs eyes on him as he eats. The sensation of being watched makes his stomach curl into a ball, and his heart kicks up like a drum at the thought that pops into his mind. Maybe heâs been found out? But how? Heâs been as careful as he knows how to be. He doesnât truly believe any of his brothers would tell, and his cousins have been too disinterested in the affair to go stirring up trouble behind it.
Their three cousins eat quietly with their eyes glued to their plates, wondering what could be the cause of their fatherâs anger this time. Theyâve known him long enough to pick up on the telltale signs of his rage, even when not openly expressed.
Itâs nothing short of a relief when dinner is finally over, though Doyoungâs blood turns to lead when he hears the Kingâs deep voice booming from behind him. âDoyoung. Come with me.â The other men shoot him varying looks as they file out of the dining room, though none of them say a word. Donghyuck throws him a concerned glance in an attempt to remain unsuspecting, though there is a slight unsteadiness in his step.
By the time he gets to the Kingâs sitting room, Doyoungâs heart is beating overtime. He stands in front of the older man with his spine ramrod straight and his lips tucked into a thin line. The King doesnât even acknowledge his presence for a few moments, simply stroking his beard and looking at some spot in the distance. Doyoung canât decide if this is worse than being pinned under his gaze or not, though he quickly gets his answer when the King finally looks at him.
âDo you understand your position as Crown Prince?â This is not what he expected to hear first, though it fails to ease his anxiety.
âOf course, Your Highness. Itâs a high honor, and one that requires a certain discipline.â
âThen why have you allowed yourself to become quite so undisciplined in your activities?â
Doyoung doesnât know how to respond to this at first. He blinks rapidly and sweat breaks out over his skin. âActivities?â he stammers out, his mouth drying up.
âYouâve allowed yourself to be enamored by a woman who is so low she must live in the forest like an animal and forage for food. And you think this behavior is becoming of a man of your station?â
The room appears to spin. If his heart was hammering before, now it stops momentarily. Doyoung feels like heâs just smashed into a stone wall head-on. âYour Highness...IâŠâ
âHave you lain with this creature?â
âSh-sheâs not...IâŠâ
âHave you? Do not lie.â
Doyoung thinks of your hands on him and feels sick at such an intimate moment being forced out into the open like this, in such a cruel manner. âYâŠyes.â
The King shakes his head, his frown deepening even more, if thatâs possible. âAnd is there any chance that she could be with child now?â
Doyoung canât remember ever feeling this humiliated, flayed open for all to see. âNo. I was...careful.â The King pauses for a moment, like he doesnât quite believe Doyoungâs claim. He doesnât ask any further questions about it, though, and Doyoung doesnât know whether to be concerned or relieved about that.
âUnderstand that you are infinitely lucky that you are not a woman, Doyoung, and can remain relatively unsullied by such acts. Nevertheless, I wouldâve thought your father wouldâve raised more diligent sons than this.â The King leans forward, and it seems like the Earth itself shifts with this movement.
âThen let one of the others have my title,â Doyoung blurts out, finally finding his voice again. âYuta or Jaehyun. It doesnât matter who it is.â
âYuta isnât getting anything,â the King spits. âDo you mean to make a complete mockery of your family? Your kingdom? To have a bastard sitting on the throne? Your father is a noble man, but laying with whores has resulted in the two biggest mistakes of his life.â
Doyoungâs head swims, and he has to bite back the first response that rises to his mind. âYour Highness, youâre correct in noting that Iâve made a grave error. Perhaps Iâm truly not suited for the role. Donât you think having my title transferred would be the best way to remedy that? Jaehyun is fit to be the Crown Prince. He can take my title, and Iââ
âAnd you can do what? Live in the forest with the rest of the dregs?â The King draws himself up in his chair, and the action reminds Doyoung of a big brown bear attempting to intimidate a trespasser in its territory. His muscles turn rigid with fear. âIt would behoove you to abandon this insane talk if you donât wish to make the consequences worse for yourself. Iâm not your father, boy, but as long as heâs left you under my care, I wonât entertain such dishonor on his behalf. â
Doyoung wants to continue protesting but also knows that, just like you told him, this appears to be a fruitless case. He lowers his head as his stomach twists and his body tenses up further with the fear of what will come next.
âAs you can expect, there will be no more visits to the village or the forest, if you can exercise no more self-control than this.â
Doyoung blinks rapidly, though there are no tears coming. âWill you send me away?â
âThat would only draw more attention, which is the last thing we need to do. You are simply to remain in the castle until itâs time for you all to return to Ceres. Barring any more royal events, you will not be going anywhere further than the front lawn.â
Doyoung says nothing to this. To speak or nod would feel like sealing his own fate, though itâs already been chosen for him.
âYou are lucky, Doyoung. Remember that. It is easier than you think for all of this to be forgotten, swept under the rug, so you can return to your homeland with your title and dignity intact. Seeâwe do not even need to let your mother and father know. In a year from now, you will be wed, and this will be nothing but a regretfulâif vagueâmemory.â
Still, Doyoung does not respond, his tongue heavy and immobile.
âYou are your familyâs honor. The consequences will not be as harsh for you...as long as you obey.â The Kingâs body relaxes now, as if all the dayâs tension has suddenly unwound itself, though this is more of a false sense of security than any true calm. âIs that understood?â
Doyoungâs throat burns. It seems like heâs being pressed in on all sides. Not answering the King is not an option. Not seeing you again is not an option, either, if he wishes to preserve any iota of happiness on this Earth. Here it comes, nowâthe wetness gathering in his eyes and the tightening of his chest.
âI understand, Your Highness.â
It has only been a few days since Doyoung last saw you, but this alone feels like centuries to him, especially with the Kingâs order trailing him like a cement block tied to his leg.
He doesnât intend on following it, regardless of the consequences. Maybe heâs not thinking straight anymore, but nothing else matters as much as you to him now.
There isnât any way to easily get to you, though, considering the guards that have been stationed outside his room every night. And the other guards who follow him around the castle nearly 24/7 now. His glamors only grant him enough leeway to disguise his face, which is no use in making it out of his doorway undetected.
The stress of it all nearly makes him physically sick.
His brothers and cousins are not guarded quite so constantly as he, but they are similarly forbidden from leaving the castleâlest they try to report back to you with a message from Doyoung, or something similar.
Doyoung still does not know how the King found out and has had no free opportunity to question his brothers and cousins about it. In the back of his mind, though, the idea that he couldâve been betrayed lives constantly among his thoughts. Thinking on it for too long makes the back of his mouth taste sour, but he canât help the festering sense of distrust he feels towards everyone around him.
Frayed and at his witâs end, Doyoung finally thinks of an idea after an entire week of missing your presence. Itâs a lot to ask for and may not work, but he needs to at least try it once before ruling it out. He has to be careful about it, of course, to avoid being found out by any of the watchful guards. Still, he manages to write a note during an etiquette lesson with his brothers, when the guards are standing outside the room. Itâs easy enough to disguise his penâs movements as him simply taking notes.
When the instructor looks down to read something from his bookâsquinting harshly even in his glasses, for his lack of sightâDoyoung slips the piece of paper to Mark. Mark gives him a questioning glance, though he says nothing. He only opens the note towards the end of the lesson, which is probably for the best because he makes a startled noise after reading it. Thankfully, it goes unnoticed by the instructor who is too busy listening to Sicheng answer a question he just asked him. Markâs eyes burn into the side of Doyoungâs face, though the older man only gives him a sparing glance and returns his attention to his papers.
 Mark and Doyoung donât get to talk formally until their next set of archery lessons. Only one of Doyoungâs guards is present that day, and he hangs back far enough outside of the archery range that itâd be difficult to hear their conversation, especially with them talking in low tones. Doyoung is the first one to initiate once their archery teacher becomes preoccupied with showing Jungwoo and Jaemin the technique for a trick shot.
He glances over at Mark after letting his arrow fly, then turns slightly toward him as he grabs another from his quiver. âMark.â
The younger manâs eyes widen a bit at hearing his name called. âWhat?â he answers full-voiced, which causes Doyoung to give him a glare. Catching onto whatâs going on, Mark throws an anxious glance behind them to the guard and to his left to the instructor, but no one pays him any mind.
âThe note.â
Mark makes a face as if heâs been caught doing something he wasnât supposed to, then quickly tries to relax his expression. âDoyoung, I donât thinkâŠis this really a good idea?â
âI need to see her, Mark,â Doyoung hisses.
Markâs eyebrows crease. He takes a moment to shoot his arrow at the target, not wanting to come off as suspicious to the others by just standing there. âIâve never created a portal likeâŠbetween Donghyuckâs room and mine, back at our castle? Yes, thatâs perfectly fine. But from here all the way to the forest? ThatâsâŠâ The younger man shakes his head, biting his lip.
âYou have to try,â Doyoung begs. âPractice it or something. All you need to do is create one to get to my room, and then to the forest. I donât care if it takes you a while, as long as I can see her again before we have to go back.â He does care, but at this point, he figures itâs better to have something than nothing.
Mark gives Doyoung a long look, shakes his head again, and then nods. âOkay. Okay. Iâll try. But I canât guarantee anything.â
Doyoung presses his lips together and nods. His eyes are desperate, though he tries not to be. âItâs okay. Just try, Mark.â
Mark spends the next few days in the library in-between lessons. Though he hasnât taken much interest in this part of the castle before now, he finds himself pouring through old, dusty books in search of something that can help him find a way to create a long-distance portal.
One of the books he finds describes simply just concentrating all your energy into your hands and putting it forth to open up a rip in spaceâwhich he is already capable of, but that doesnât help him with projecting it out further. Another contains a weird chanting verse that he tries to pronounce, to no avail. Even if it did work, he wouldnât know how to say it.
However, he eventually happens upon something that catches his eye.
âThe Root Chakra serves as the foundation of your body and soul. Only when you are firmly grounded in your current body, space, and time can you begin to manipulate other spaces in timeâŠwhether it concerns generating long-range portals through space manipulation or even accessing different moments in history.â
âOpening the Root Chakra, huh?â Mark laughs to himself quietly and shakes his head. Despite being a magic user since birth, along with the rest of his brothers, this is the first time heâs heard anything of the sort. But itâs better later than never to learn.
Perhaps heâs more invested in this scheme than he should be, for both his and his brotherâs sakes, but he also knows that he hasnât seen Doyoung so fulfilled and joyful since discovering the forest. If his efforts can make a bit of difference in Doyoungâs current sunken mood, Mark is willing to try.
Therefore, he sets to work on âopeningâ this purported Chakra, keeping his practice to late-night hours to ensure he wonât be walked in on by anyone else. He feels a bit awkward at first, maybe even a little foolish, with âmeditatingâ and trying to reach out to some strange energy inside himself. Heâs never had to put much thought into creating portals before; itâs just something that happens as he wills it. He never considered that there might be more to the practiceâthat heâd need to tap into some kind of extra energy to improve his skills. He thinks back to the magic crystals in the marketplace and wonders if theyâd be any help in this situation, though thereâs no way of finding out.
Mark practices opening portals within the floor, knowing his room is above an empty guest room, as itâs too risky to try any of the walls; Jisung and Jungwoo sleep in the rooms on either side of him. He is soon able to make his portals wider than beforeâwhere they used to be the width of only his palmsâwhich allows him to peer more clearly into the empty room below, though he still hasnât tried to conjure anything farther away than that.
Once he feels he has more control over his energy, Mark soon begins experimenting with visualization, a technique the book cites for conjuring up long-distance locations. Allowing his energy to concentrate in his hands, he places his palms just above the floor of his room and pictures a place heâs fairly familiar with by nowâthe library. If it goes as planned, heâll have created a portal to the library; if notâŠwho knows what will be on the other side.
He feels the energy flow through his body, from his core, up his back, across his shoulders, and down his armsâŠit gathers in his palms and fingertips and triggers a small rip in time, which he gradually coaxes open wider, all the while visualizing the library as clearly as he can. Mark pushes the portal open a bit wider still and opens his eyes slightly to see if itâs worked. Heâs dismayed, however, when he still sees the empty guest room sitting below him. A heavy sigh leaves his body, and it pushes the rest of his energy out with it; the portal closes with a silent snap.
Guess heâll just have to try again.
The next few tries work similarly, and on those nights, he often ends up climbing into bed feeling discouraged and sapped of strength and wondering if heâll ever get it, or if any of this is worth it. He keeps at it, though, for Doyoungâs benefit. And also partly because heâs curious to see what heâs capable of; now that heâs opened these floodgates, he needs to see how far he can push himself.
The first real hint of success takes him by surprise. It doesnât happen quite as cleanly or perfectly as the book says, but something happens. When Mark opens his eyes that time, heâs still looking at the guest roomâbut now there appears to be a faint afterimage of the library merged with it, as if someone had tried to paint two different pictures at once. Itâs not a complete location shift by any means, and he doesnât try to go into the portalâafraid he might somehow get stuck between two realitiesâbut itâs a start.
Improving on that start requires a little more time. More hours of meditating, reading, pushing his energy out and expanding it, visualizing. The afterimage begins growing clearer all the while.
On one blessed night, Mark opens his eyes, and the library itself is sitting below him. Not a faint representation of it, merged with some other room of the castle, but the actual library. Heâs so surprised that he almost closes the portal by accident and has to steady his concentration to keep the energy flowing. Carefully, he sticks one hand through it. Then the other. It is still hard to keep the entrance open without physically guiding it with his hands, but he can manage it for a minute or two.
He looks at the long distance beneath him to the floor, with nothing but a lounge sofa to break his landing. Sweat breaks out on his skin, but he takes a moment to steel himself and take a deep breath. Then, he jumps through the portal feet-first, bouncing clumsily onto the sofa and tumbling onto the floor. Just as quick as he can right himself, he hurries behind the sofa to hide, afraid he mightâve alerted one of the guards with his rough landing. The portal has already closed above him with the loss of directed energy.
Mark waits for what feels like forever, his legs burning from holding the crouch, but no one comes. When heâs positive itâs safe, he places his hands on the floor and this time tries to create a portal back to his room. The spacetime-rip flickers briefly as if it wonât work, and a surge of panic rises in him, but soon it displays the sight of his bed and the nightstands on either side. A sigh of relief leaves him, and he jumps through the portal as smoothly as he can, landing on his bed this time.
Now, he is ready. He hopes.
The end of Septemberâand the end of their stay in Euphemeâapproaches. By that time, it has been weeks since you and Doyoung have seen each other. The one bright spot, though, lies with Mark.
Mark passes Doyoung a note during another of their etiquette lessons. The older man doesnât wait to open it, though he keeps a watchful eye on the instructor as he does.
I think Iâve done it. Letâs try tonight.
Doyoung sucks in a breath and slowly lets it back out. Then, he crumbles the piece of paper up and shoves it into the pocket of his pants. He gives Mark a small nod, and Mark returns it before facing the teacher again as if nothing has happened.
Even though Doyoung had already given Mark instructions for how to create the portal, he is a bit unsure what to expect that night. He sits on the edge of his bed fully clothed, his hands clasped nervously together as his eyes dart all around the room, wondering where Mark will show up at.
He soon gets his answer when a teal ring of light manifests itself on the east wall of his room. It remains small only for a few moments before widening out enough to accommodate Markâs form as he steps through it. Mark himself looks a bit shocked at what heâs just accomplished, even though heâs been doing it for a good amount of time now. Doyoung leaps up from the bed, about to speak, though he winces and remembers they still need to be mindful of the guards outside his door.
âYou really did it,â Doyoung whispers, watching in awe as Mark closes the portal to his own room behind him.
âI did,â Mark affirms, and he canât help but grin a little. However, his smile slips. âThere is one thing, though.â
Doyoungâs stomach drops, and he can only imagine what this caveat will be. âWhat is it?â
âWell, once Iâve created the portal, Iâll have to keep it open,â Mark says. âOtherwise, I wonât know when youâre coming backâŠsince we canât communicate. ButâŠIâll only be able to keep energy flowing into it for about 15 minutes, maybe less, soâŠâ
ââŠso make it quick. Right?â Doyoung replies. He is not surprised. Not because of any lack in Markâs abilities, but more because this just seems to be the kind of luck thatâs afflicted him as of late. Mark nods sheepishly.
âJustâŠbe aware of the time,â Mark says, giving Doyoung an apologetic look. The older man only nods silently and steps back as he lets the younger do his work. Mark walks over to the wall he just came from and places his palms against it, taking a deep breath, closing his eyes, and concentrating. He holds the image of the forest entrance in his mindâs eye and shifts the power out from his hands and to the wall, opening up a gap in space as the portal widens.
Doyoungâs heart rate picks up as he sees that familiar forest entrance forming in front of him, still crowded with overgrowth and greenery. He steps over to Mark to see it closer, and he can even feel the cool night air brushing past his skin as he peers in.
Mark opens his eyes and nods for Doyoung to go on, and the older gives him a nervous smile. âThank you.â
Indeed, the forest on the other side is the exact same one heâs been visiting for the entire summer. The same dirt underneath his feet, the same trees crowding each other in. For that reason, he doesnât waste any more time with rushing inside, heading straight for the oak tree.
Thereâs an indignant sentence waiting on your lips when you hear Doyoung crashing into your forest late that night, not having seen him in weeks. Youâre hurt, but you also realize there must be something serious going on back at the castle if itâs taken him this long to get back to you. However, the words die when you see the pure anguish on his face as he bursts out of the vegetation.
You slip out of the oak tree to meet him on the ground, and he scoops you in his arms like he did all those weeks ago, though this passion is now charged with fear. âDoyoung, whatâs happened? Whatâs the matter? What has kept you so long?â you ask worriedly, taking his face in your hands.
Doyoung holds you close and simply buries his face in the front of your dress for a long moment, breathing in your scent and absorbing the warmth of your skin. Though you are terrified and confused, you wait for him to calm himself enough to speak to you.
âI canât anymore,â he says, his voice low and broken. Your heart drops at this.
âCanât what?â you ask, though you already know the answer.
âThe King has forbidden me to come hereâI shouldnât be here now, but Mark...Y/N, Iâm so sorry.â
You hold Doyoung tighter against you, as if you could both become one being if you concentrated hard enoughâwished hard enough. Your head throbs with the hurt of it, and your heart feels as if itâs being cleaved in two. You donât say anything for a while, biting your lip so hard that it nearly bleeds.
âI tried.â He presses his forehead to yours. âForgive me. I tried.â
âThereâs no one to blame,â you argue, breathless from the vise pinching your heart and lungs. âI think we both knew how this would endâŠâ
âI donât want it to be this way. Y/N, forgive me. I shouldâve never told you anythingâŠperhaps if Iâd kept my feelings to myself, we wouldnât be in this mess now. You could live happily as you were, and Iââ
âDonât. Please donât. I wouldnât trade our time together for any living beingâŠnot even the gods.â You shake your head as tears begin to slip down your cheeks. Doyoung tries to wipe them away, though tears of his own escape without his permission. âIt may be selfish, butâŠI-I just ask thatâŠp-please donât forget about me when you leave and start your own family.â
Doyoung takes a deep, shuddering breath and presses your head into his chest. âI could never,â he whispers.
He thinks heâs safe in your arms, and you safe in his. Thatâs what heâd like to believe, as you sit here together in the forest for the last time. Unbeknownst to him, something in the castle stirs and then bursts to life, violent and red-hot with rage.
Mark, on the other side of the portal, waits. He feels his energy weakening the longer he holds it open, but he does so anyway as nervous sweat gathers on his temples. He wants to call out to Doyoung to somehow warn him of the time limit, but remembers that the guards will hear it if he does. So he remains silent and waits impatiently as the end of the 15 minutes approaches.
However, he canât wait any longer as the time ticks past. His magic flickers once, as does the portal, before disappearing completely. Mark nearly keels over at the loss of energy and has to catch himself as quietly as possible, bracing his shaking hands against the floor. He pushes himself up a bit and sits on his knees. He thinks desperately to himself, I should make another portal, but he doesnât have enough energy for that at the moment.
The next move he makes is a costly one.
He reaches into his pants pocket for his pocketwatch, which he remembered to bring with him. He intends to see how far it is past the time theyâd agreed Doyoung would come back, and how long it might take him to regain enough strength for another portal, but his shaky hands cause him to drop the small watch. He tries to grab the chain, but the movement is too sudden and clumsy and causes the watch to bounce even farther away from him, skittering clear off the rug and onto the hardwood floor.
Mark swears all his organs stop functioning at once when he hears a knock on the door. Itâs quiet at first, and the silence is deafening. He thinks about scurrying up into the bed and lying there to pretend like heâs Doyoung, still asleep and not out in the forest, but his legs are locked with fear and lingering weakness. The second knock is more forceful, and the guard doesnât wait for much longer before jamming his key in the lock and swinging the door open.
Mark whips his head around, and they both stare at each other dumbstruck for a moment. The guardâs gaze lingers at Mark in confusion, then quickly sweeps over to the empty bed. His eyebrows draw into a furious expression. âWhere is the Crown Prince?â
Doyoungâs heart squeezes painfully at the thought of returning to Ceres without you, his brothers going on with their lives as normal despite his own secret heartacheâand itâs only then that he realizes heâs lost track of the time. He jerks away from your arms, looking around frantically. âWaitâMark.â
âMark?â you repeat, confused.
âIâŠhe made a portal so I could get here, but I was supposed toâŠshit. Come on.â Doyoung takes your hand and you both rush to the forest entrance. When you get there, though, thereâs no portal and no Mark. Doyoungâs grip around your hand tightens.Â
Though you arenât totally sure whatâs going on, a sudden dread overcomes you. âWhat happened to it?â
âHe probably had to close it, butâŠIâm sure heâll open it again once he gets his energy back.â Doyoungâs voice is uncertain, though, like heâs trying to convince you both. You look at the side of his face and try not to voice your fears, but as you both stand there waiting to see if the portal will reappear, it becomes apparent that something has went wrong with the plan.
âExplain yourself.â
âYour HighnessâŠIâŠumâŠâ Markâs mouth is too dry for him to properly form words, and his legs shake where he stands. Not because of having his energy sappedâbecause of the Kingâs overbearing presence. The King stands in front of him, not even bothering to go to his desk this time, and Mark has to crane his neck a bit to look at him, though he canât meet his eyes. âIt was justâŠâ
âI wonât ask again.â
Mark shakes his head and pulls at his hair, silently begging Doyoung for forgiveness in his mind. Still, he doesnât say anything to give his brother up, keeping his eyes averted more out of fear than deference. âPlease, Your HighnessâŠI justâŠâ
When the King sees that Mark wonât give a direct answer, he scoffs in disgust, sweeps the younger man out of the way, and heads for the door. Though Mark only moves a few inches, he feels like he might as well have been thrown clear across the room. The King speaks to one of Doyoungâs guards, who was standing just behind Mark. âCall the rest of the guards. Iâve exhausted my patience on the matter; these lecherous whores cannot be allowed to continue defiling my kingdom.â
âWh-what does that mean?â Markâs small voice is lost to the air as the King leaves the room without a glance backwards. The guard goes to enact his order, while the other one grips Mark tightly by the upper arm and drags him out of the sitting room. âN-no, wait, whatâs about to happen?â
The guard yanks Markâs arm in a gesture that calls for the questioning to come to an end. âBest keep quiet, boy. You and the Crown Prince have gotten yourself into enough shit tonight.â Then he chuckles. âOne of these days, he was bound to find out that everyone wonât keep coddling him and wiping his ass. About to lose his title over some pussy. Quite sad, isnât it?â
The guardâs wordsâand the realization that none of them have ever really cared about Doyoungâs wellbeing beyond being his hired watchdogsâsets Mark off. âShut the fuck up!â Mark spits in his eye and stomps on the manâs foot at the same time, and the guard curses and lets him go for a split second. Mark doesnât wait. He takes off down the hall, unsure where heâs going but knowing the castle is big enough to lose the guardâas long as he doesnât run into anyone else.
He just needs to get somewhere where he can have enough time to create another portal.
âThis canât be goodâŠâ you finally say. You and Doyoung must have a death grip on each otherâs hands right now, but neither of you are willing to pull away.
Doyoung shakes his head slowly. âNoâŠitâs been too long. Maybe I-I should go back. Maybe if I go back willingly nowâŠâ He trails off, not knowing what could come at the end of that sentence.
âDoyoung, no. IâŠplease donât leave me.â You feel mentally torn between sending him away and knowing this is the last time youâll see him versus having him stay here with you, if only for a few minutes more. At this point, youâre not sure what the right answer is anymore.
âThey might come looking for me, Y/N, and I donât want them coming here disturbing the forestâ"
âStay! You can hide somewhere, IâŠas the keepers of the forest, weâve been handling ourselves against intruders for years. We can protect ourselvesâand you. If they come, you can hide out here until they leave. Please, stay.â
Doyoung cannot say no to you or your pleading eyes. He nods. He doesnât know whatâs going to happen after all thisâif he wants to go back to the castle, or if heâll even be allowed to return. He doesnât know what theyâll do to him in retaliation, and even the vague idea of it frightens him. Having his title removed is one thing, but the King of Eupheme is far more vindictive than that.
You and Doyoung only make it to the small cave youâd hidden in on that rainy day before you hear the distinct sound of another pair of feet crashing through the woods. You both whip your heads around, though you also grab Doyoungâs arm and pull him under the cover of the willow tree. Your mind is racing a mile a minute, and you are too frantic to be able to sense who this new person is; though the question is quickly answered by a sharp whisper.
âDoyoung! Doyoung?â
âItâs Mark,â Doyoung hisses, his eyes widening. He slips between the tree branches and softly calls Markâs name. In another few moments, the younger man is standing under the tree with you both.
âWhat happened?!â Doyoung asks, holding onto the younger boyâs shoulders.
âIâm sorry, Doyoung.â This is all Mark can say, and the words roll off his tongue repeatedly. He hangs his head. âThe King knows, and heâs sent the guards to come hereâI donât know what heâs going to do, butâplease believe me. It doesnât sound good. Heâs done being reasoned with.â
You and Doyoung look at each other with trepidation gripping your chests, realizing the stakes are much higher than you anticipated. This does not sound like just another case of âunwelcome intruders,â but âunwelcome intruders with bloodlust on their minds.â
âButâI can create another portal. Iâm sorry, the last time, I justâbut I can make one now. Come with us, please.â The last sentence is directed at you, and you shake your head.
âAnd go where? Theyâll still be waiting for me at the castle. Are you suggesting we run away from Eupheme?â Doyoungâs voice is not reprimanding, but more incredulous than anything else.
Markâs hands shake at the idea of turning his back on his family, which is something heâs never had to consider beforeânot even in the slightest sense. Things have gotten much more out of hand than he couldâve predicted.
You shake your head again, your hand slipping from Doyoungâs. âJustâŠIâll stay here and help the others. You should go.â
âY/N, I...â Doyoungâs throat tightens as he tries to speak, but his thoughts are disrupted by a quickly mounting commotion. The sound of hooves beating in the distance, though getting increasingly closer. The shouts of men who are ready to wage a battle, with fire racing through their veins.
Though most of Arthenia is asleep at this time of night, the noise of the horsesâ hooves and the soldiersâ shouts is enough to begin waking the townspeople up out of their beds. Faces press against windows and peep out of doorways to see whatâs happening.
The villagers are terrified when they see a group of soldiers adorned in the royal insignia and riding on horses enter Arthenia with lit torches in their hands, thinking their homes are about to be destroyed. However, they become even more confused and frantic when they quickly realize this band of men is paying their properties no mind and heading straight in the direction of the forest instead.
Some of Artheniaâs magic-wielders rush from their homes to try to put a stop to the men once they understand the situation, and the orcs and ogres meet them with brute force alone. The guards are met with a fight fiercer than they expected, even with their torches and daggers, not realizing the villagers could be so battle-hardy.
The King watches the battle ensuing in Arthenia from a hilly vantage point above the small town. The guards have failed to make much more headway against the villagers, who are gradually inching them back towards the village entrance. Shaking his head in disgust, the King pulls on his horseâs reins. âIf you want something done, do it yourself.â
Some of the townspeople notice the Kingâs appearance just before he rides into the village. A few of them falter and cower in fear, finding the nearest exit point and taking their leave. Some others, incensed at their town being threatened and generally filled with rage at the Kingâs lack of fair leadership, decide to charge him head-on. Theyâre quickly extinguished, though, when the King conjures a great sphere of fire in his hands and whips it across them without a second thought.
He does the same to any other Arthenians who attempt to challenge him as he cuts a path through the village, uncaring of the land and homes he sets on fire as he does. A couple of the guards hop back on their steeds and follow him to his ultimate destination.
The King drives forward into the foliage. The women of the forest are armed with their own heavy rocks and sharpened arrows and daggers dipped in poisonous berry juice, though their weapons can barely leave their hands before everything is suddenly being enveloped in a wide swath of fire, meted out by the Kingâs hand. He leaves a path clear for himself and the guards in the middle, but the trees on either side are sent up in a blaze.
The two guards remain in single file behind him to use his fire as a shield and avoid the sharp rocks and poison-dipped darts zooming past their heads. Perhaps theyâve underestimated these tree-dwellers; already, there have been a few scrapes that were too close for comfort with the jagged edge of a rock or two. The guards light up as much greenery as they can as they go, using their torches to ignite leaves and low-hanging branches.
All around them, there are the sounds of Arthenians and dryads screaming in tandem as their homes go up in flames. A few nymphs lie fallen among the grass, unmoving as their tree homes burn up in the night.
The King, who has had the foresight to bring his shield, keeps it steady in front of him as he blasts fireballs out from behind it, lighting up one group of trees after another. He doesnât know which one belongs to you, but he is willing to burn down the entire forest to find out. His movements are wilder than theyâd normally be, which says a lot even for him, who has previously had no trouble slashing down anyone who stood in his way during battleâeven if they were innocents.
âDoyoung!â The King shouts, and he whips up a great blanket of fire. He sends it careening up towards the sky like a shooting star, and it lands high among the tree canopy, heavy and far-reaching enough to burn treetops several feet in every direction. The guards become a bit wary at this, as the flames blaze above their heads and send sparks and burning debris flying down. âDoyoung!â His voice shakes the leaves like thunder. âIf you do not wish to burn alive with these forest dregs, show yourself now!â
Doyoungâs spine stiffens as he hears his name echoing through the woods. It comes from a distance behind you all but is still too close for reassurance. If you stay in this spot for another few minutes, the King or one of his guards could be right on top of your heads.
âCome on!â Doyoung pulls your hand tightly as he helps you up the edge of a steep grassy incline, Mark supporting you from below. Though youâd be able to make it up there any other time by yourself, you donât dare deny the help now. Your whole body feels like a live wire of fear and panic; the forest burns around you, and the encroaching smoke threatens to choke all three of you to death. Most of all, you feel devastated to see whatâs happening around you, being essentially powerless to stop it. Nothing of this degree has ever befallen your home before; even the rare small blaze could be easily enough snuffed out. But not when the flames are being stoked and encouraged like thisâbuilding upon each other to see which can reach the tallest tree or the farthest edge of the forest.
After you reach solid ground, Doyoung drags Mark up behind you. Thereâs no time to pause after all three of you are on the ground; Doyoung grips your hand again and Mark follows behind the two of you as you run.
âThe tree, the tree, the treeâŠâ These words spill from your lips in a frenzy. Though your tree hasnât been touched by the flames yet, itâs only a matter of time with the forest rapidly catching on fire. You can still feel the deep anguish of every other tree in the forest as their trunks catch fire, their leaves shrivel up, and the water evaporates from their root systems. Their silent screams and the shouts of your fellow dryads ring in your head loud enough to make you fear that your skull will split.
âWhere are we going?â Mark asks, covering his nose with his sleeve and coughing profusely at the smoke all around.
âOut of the forest!â Doyoung shouts back. He doesnât really know where to go except for the edge of the woods, and you arenât in a state to tell him where to head. Deep down, he knows you want to turn back and go to your tree. The oak tree lives innately in you and you inside of it, and it calls you to come back, but the path is too dangerous; returning to it would only speed up what appears to be progressively inevitable. The King and his guards are somewhere in the forest behind you all, and turning back would only land you right in their hands or in the tendrils of the fire.
One of the guards feels a tinge of nervousness grow as the fire rages on around them, and he decides to try to reach out to the King. âYour Highness! I will go in search of Doyoung. Perhaps we should fetch him now before some danger befalls him; the fire is spreading exponentially.â The King gives him a signal to depart, though his eyes still burn just as brightly as the flames do.
The guard separates from the King to cut a path diagonally through the woods, going off to find Doyoung. The Crown Prince may have disobeyed the Kingâwhich is as good as committing treason against the kingdomâbut it would still not look favorable for him to have died in a fire started at the Kingâs hands. However, the King is too far engulfed in the whirlwind of his own rage to consider these things more deeply.
The other guard stays by the Kingâs side, though his horse nervously shifts in place at the flames all around. The two men come to a stop in a wide and messy half-circle of fire, their backs to the flames as they watch the woods ahead for any signs of approaching creaturesâor Doyoung himself.
Unbeknownst to the King, your oak tree sits only a few feet away in a yet-untouched portion of greenery.
A few leaves suddenly fall off a tree up aheadâtoo sudden to merely be caused by the windâand this makes the King whip his head around and raise his hand to unleash more fire. Nothing appears from that spot, however, and the leaves remain as still as they were before. That moment of hesitancy costs him.
A small poison-tipped dart shoots from the leaves, catapulted by the force of a sudden, expertly-timed breath through a wooden blowgun. It lands squarely in the Kingâs open palm, which still faces the tree. A shout bursts from his throat in response, and it is only then that the guard realizes whatâs just happened.
âYour Highnessâ!â
The shock and pain of the sudden assault causes the King to strike out in delayed anger, sending a wave of fire at the row of trees ahead of himâand a little further beyond, your oak tree in its small, grassy clearing. The dart burns up in his palm as he does, but its sharp point has already broken his skin. His reaction, though hampered by a few seconds, doesnât afford Cassia much time to do anything but watch as a wall of feverish red and orange overtakes her, but her last few thoughts linger with youâwhere you might be within the forest right now, and if she could see you again in some faraway afterlife.
Youâve always known you would die when your tree finally did, but you werenât sure what you expected it to feel like.
Certainly, not this kind of great reckoningâa sensation of every living element simultaneously being drained from your body. It feels like the core essence of your being has been cracked like an egg and is now flowing out endlessly, laid to waste in the grass. The sudden weakness that eclipses you makes it so that you can barely move your legs to continue running, and you collapse to the ground.
Mark nearly trips over your fallen form, but he quickly finds his voice and screams for Doyoung. The older man is already turning around, however, at feeling your hand slip from his. He rushes to you immediately, his eyes growing wide as he tucks his hands under you and scoops you into his arms.
âY/N, Iâm sorry, please! Y/N, please, no!â
âDoyoungâŠâ
âNo. No! Iâm begging...please, stay with me.â
Tears spill from his eyes in an endless torrent. You would like to touch his face at least once more, and you are infinitely gladâif not also heartbrokenâwhen he grabs your hand and holds it to his cheek. His tears wet your skin, running down your palm.
âIâŠI already told you not to forget me, so pleaseâŠâ
âY/N, Iâve got to get you out of hereâŠâ Doyoung says desperately, and he struggles to make it to his feet. His legs tremble too much to support him, though, and his shoes slide in the leaves and dirt underfoot. Mark stumbles backwards, his back hitting a tree trunk as his muscles tense in horror at the scene in front of him.
âD-donât. Leave me here.â Even saying this much feels like a massive effort.
âWhat?â
âTh-the forest and I are one in the same. I live and die here. PleaseâŠdo this one thing for me, Doyoung.â You look at him imploringly with as much strength as you can summon despite your eyes growing heavier. Beyond the smoke, the cloudiness of your own tears, and the pull of death, itâs becoming harder to see; his features blur amid your surroundings.
Doyoung is quiet for a moment, though he slowly nods, gripping your hand tightly. He lowers his forehead to yours, and through the smoke and fire, he swears he can still smell the scent of jasmine. âI love you, Y/N.â
âMy princeâŠâ The corners of your mouth rise in a tiny smile. âI love you.â
The Crown Prince keeps his forehead against yours, his tears raining down on your cheeks long after youâve gone limp in his arms.
Mark slumps to the ground, feeling as if his stomach will turn itself inside out, his heart hammering in his chest. He tries to breathe evenly, though his chest tightens painfully from the attempt. Eventually, he buries his face in his hands, trying to physically shut out the ache. Heâs not sure how much time passes like that, with him and his brother immobilized on the ground, but he does know they need to leave, soon, as the air around them grows more stifling.
âDoyoungâŠD-Doyoung, we need toâŠw-we shouldâŠâ Markâs voice cracks, coming out weak in the roar of the noise around them. He coughs again, then shuffles to his feet, leaning on the tree for support.
Doyoung looks up at him without a word, his face streaked with tears and dirt. Then, slowly, he unravels himself from you and lays your body gently on the ground. He shuns his cloak to cover you with it, though part of him desires to stay here and perish with you instead of leaving only a portion of himself behind.
Him and Mark travel a few more yards through the woods, and though heâs never seen this part of the landscape before, he can guess they might be nearing the edge of the forest. The trees have begun thinning out here like they did at the small circular lake.
âWaitâ" Mark calls out. Doyoung doesnât bother looking back at Mark, but he can hear it too. The sound of horse hooves increases in volume, and they soon see one of the guards riding towards them, torch still in hand.
âCrown Prince! Prince Mark!â he shouts. âCome with me immediately!â
Doyoung looks frantically towards the ground. A sizeable rock catches his eye, bigger than the palm of his hand, and he picks it up. Without a second thought, he launches it at the guardâs face. It catches the guard on the left side of his face with a sickening pop, causing him to yell out in pain and fall from his horse. His torch falls from his grasp, starting yet another small fire where it lands.
With its rider gone, the horse slows its pace, though it does not stop. Doyoung catches it by the reins and is able to bring it to a pause long enough for him and Mark to get on. Everything else falls away from him as he guides them towards the forestâs outskirts; he barely feels the wind whipping past them, the lingering smoke stinging his eyes, or even the sturdy animal racing underneath him. He has a brief thought about what happened to those dangerous animals you said live on the outskirts, as there are none here now, but he reasons that maybe theyâve already made their own escape.
The sky is turning lighter now from the approaching dawn. When they finally breach the last row of trees in the woods, they come out onto an expansive field, only broken up by stray trees here and there and other landforms. On the far horizon, another town looms against the sky, though itâs much bigger than Arthenia.
Doyoung signals for the horse to stop, and both he and Mark sit there for a few long moments. Mark sucks in a few deep breaths, as if he were the one running this entire time.Â
âW-whatâŠwhat now?â
Doyoung doesnât answer at first. Then, quietly, he asks, âAre you coming?â
Mark doesnât know where his brother intends to go, but he wordlessly understands that it isnât back to the castle. Or even Ceres. He swallows against the lump in his throat.
âIâŠI have to see the others.â He means their brothers. He means their parents back in Ceres, if he is even allowed to live. He is not sure what the King will do to him once he returnsâif heâll be tried for treason. Still, his chest burns with the desire to see his siblings at least once more.
Maybe thatâs how he justifies it.
Heâs not entirely sure why he refuses Doyoung in this moment, even when he thinks back on it years from now. Maybe he is too ashamed of the guiltâof feeling like it was all his fault. (If he hadnât dropped the stopwatchâŠ) He doesnât want to serve as that constant reminder for his brother.
âCan you get back, then?â Doyoung asks. Mark realizes heâs referring to creating another portal, and he nods, though somewhat hesitantly.
âYâŠyeah. I can.â He swallows again and hesitates for another moment. Then, Mark dismounts from the horse and looks up at Doyoung. âWhereâŠwhere will you go?â
If the older man has already planned his route, he doesnât disclose it. He simply looks at Mark with an expression that can only be described as pitiable, broken. His eyes are red-rimmed and his skin is ashen. âGoodbye, Mark.â
Mark stares at his retreating back as he leads the horse away and across the field. The space between them stretches out into forever, with a million unsaid thoughts and emotions falling in the gap.
Behind him, the forest continues to burn, taking all life with it. In front of him, Doyoungâs form turns into a speck against the endless green. It is a long time before Mark leaves that spot in the grass.
In the castle, Donghyuck slumps against his window as he watches smoke rising in the far distance, already knowing where itâs coming from. Like a mirror image of his older brother, tear tracks make their way down his face as he buries his head in his arms.
âWhat have I done?â
#doyoung fic#doyoung scenarios#doyoung imagines#doyoung smut#doyoung fluff#doyoung angst#kim doyoung#nct#nct 127#nct scenarios#nct fic#nct imagines#nct smut#nct fluff#nct angst#nct 127 scenarios#nct 127 imagines#nct 127 smut#nct 127 fluff#nct 127 angst#nct 127 fic#ambw#ambw fic#ambw kpop#ambw scenarios#ambw imagines
298 notes
·
View notes
Text
when you feel like the world is crashing down on you : fushiguro megumi
Hina/n : iâve been feeling pretty down, and megumi (and xiao from genshin impact) seems to be my only source of joy at this point, so letâs make ourselves feel better, yes?
characters: fushiguro megumi
contents: megumi helping you through one of youâre more depressing moods
warnings: feelings of depression & anxiety, teeth rotting megumi fluff
usually, when megumi came back from a mission, he would find you and complain about the task his annoying teacher gave him, which would then lead to the both of you sleeping soundly somewhere in your room. he found solace in the comforting silence, despite not always sleeping on your bed. he was too exhausted to move, so he took what he could get.
after a particularly troublesome mission, in which he met his brand new classmate and an overpowered demon king, he quickly made his way towards your room after his injuries were taken care of.
however, when he tried to welcome himself into your dorm, he found that the door was locked. that was the first sign. you never locked your door, knowing that he would visit frequently to spend time with the only person he could really tolerate, ignoring the possibility that gojo or one of the second years could just as likely barge in.
he rapped his knuckles against the door, â(y/n)? itâs me.â
when he only received silence as a response, he knocked again but with a little more force.
again, he didnât get a response. pressing his ear against the door, he recognized the songs playing in the background as the ones on their collaborative playlist and noticed the faint sniffling almost drowned out by the music.
in a fit of concern, he picked up his key to her dorm from his room across from hers. âiâm going to come in, okay?â he carefully opened the door, finding his girlfriend lying on her side, softly singing the lyrics to the song in a broken voice,
he wasnât familiar with affection, despite being in a relationship with her. but after knowing her for a few years, he realized that it was okay and that she really just needed him to be himself around her. she didnât force him into anything, which he appreciated greatly.Â
but it was at times like these where he willingly made himself more affectionate for her. of course, that really only meant cuddling with her in bed, but it seemed to be plenty.
taking his usual place behind her, assuming the role of big spoon, he wrapped his arms around her waist and buried his head in her hair. his hands, rough and calloused from years of training as a jujutsu sorcerer and beating the shit out of middle school bullies, cradled her own that were surprisingly soft for a fellow sorcerer.Â
his chest rumbled as he hummed with her, knowing the tune of the song well after hearing it so many times. finally snapping out of her trance, she blinked a bit before moving further into his embrace.
âdid something happen today?â he asked softly, his voice low and gentle as to not scare her.
she shook her head, âno, itâs me overthinking again. itâs honestly nothing.â
âitâs not nothing if youâre crying about it. tell me what happened.â
she sighed, silence was useless. the two usually confronted each other in times of doubt and need, so nothing went unanswered. she pointed to her phone on his side of the bed. briefly leaning over to grab it, he opened it, smiling at the sight of the two of them and his divine dogs as her homescreen.Â
âcheck my messages,â she instructed.
he did so, furrowing his brows in confusion. everything was normal. he was her pinned conversation and her most recent, which wasnât new. he also found that she had also recently texted gojo, their teacher, about souvenirs, principal yaga, and even nanami-san that she occasionally went on mission with. the second years were currently out on missions, so it made sense that she hadnât messaged them in a while.
âwhatâs the problem?â he asked bluntly. he didnât understand what was wrong and he knew she would clear his confusion.
grabbing his hands with her own, fiddling with them, she said, âitâs just- i think-â she struggled to find the words, âi think hina and aiko are ghosting me.â
âwhat?â
âmegumi, they havenât texted me in three months. before we graduated middle school, they promised that they would stay in touch. you knew how close we were.â
he hummed in agreement.
âi think iâm just annoying them at this point, they havenât answered any of my texts, and if they do theyâre really fucking dry, and ignore all my calls. they never did before! maybe iâm just being too clingy. iâm probably annoying them. no wonder, i even annoy myself sometimes.â
panicking slightly, you began to hyperventilate. spewing out words at the speed of light as you tried to calm yourself. turning you so that you were facing him, he held the back of your head and pushed you into his chest. listening to his heart beat, you slowly calmed down, attempting to match you breathing patterns with him. your tears fell freely, dampening his shirt.
he pet you head, running his long finger through your hair. he hushed you gently as you continued to cry silently into his chest there were no words needed at the moment. comfort wasnât always found in positive words between the two of you. you both recognized that sugar coating your comfort would prove to be fruitless later, so you found that it was better to just remain silent.
after a few minutes, he began to speak again, âyour crying so much that i can barely recognize you.â he jested.
you scoffed, âthanks, very comforting meg.â
he chuckled lowly, âitâs true. the (y/n) i know would never cry because of two measly humans. they wouldnât care of they ignored them, you know why.â
 âwhy is that, meg?â
âbecause she knows that she has an annoying teacher, a bunch of powerful senpai, two new classmates,â he smiled slightly, âand a troublesome jerk of a boyfriend there for her. she has no need to worry about two girls when she has all of these people here for her.â
she laughed, causing his heart to swell at the sound. he continued, âwhy would a menace to society such as herself bother with two normies? the (y/n) i know smiles at curses demise, and as unsettling it is, it just shows how fearless she is. she would never be brought down by two regular girls who donât realize what their missing out on.â
she laughed loudly at that, wrapping her arms around her torso with a large smile. it was also then that megumi realized that she was wearing one of his sweatshirts (which he now always buys with the intention of her wearing them). his heart practically burst as he realized she still found comfort in him despite him not being their physically earlier.
she smirked up at him as he did the same to her, âsince when were you this comforting, fushiguro. usually all i get is a hug and a nap.â
he shrugged, facing the ceiling (an attempt to hide his reddening cheeks), âsince i got a girlfriend who actually happens to like my hugs and a nap. i wanted to put in more effort to be better for her, yâsee.â
âwell, as the said girlfriend, i would like to say that iâm perfectly content with how my boyfriend is now. he tends to try an improve himself for me, but i think that heâs just lovely the way he is.â
âyeah well, my little menace to society deserves more than she realizes. so i will do everything in my power to make sure she realizes it.â
she hummed, her eyelids starting to droop, âthis menace to society appreciates everything that her fellow menace does for her, including napping with her. which happens to sound incredibly tempting right now.â
âindeed.â
#jjk#jjk megumi#jujutsu kaisen#jujutsu kaisen megumi#megumi#fushiguro#megumi fushiguro#fushiguro megumi#megumi x reader#fushiguro x reader#megumi fluff#fushiguro fluff#oneshot#jujutsu kaisen oneshot#anime#fluff#jujutsu kaisen fushiguro#i need and irl fushiguro megumi#i hate being lonely
133 notes
·
View notes
Text
sanctuary: six
![Tumblr media](https://64.media.tumblr.com/b794f9764b0c85c788dd273eebee07a0/2558467a7f236f50-7b/s540x810/b1c2d4f3e6fe13077dfb475602931d73526d6de8.jpg)
summary: leaving your father was easy. leaving them? well...thatâs a different kind of strength. 7.9k words.
genre: mafia au, fluff, major angst
pairing: ot7 x reader
warnings:Â toxic and dysfunctional familial relationships, mentions of domestic abuse (physical and verbal), swearing, ptsd & trauma, poor mental health, mentions of anxiety & panic attacks, reader goes to therapy, hurt, argument/yelling, the boys are mean...
authorâs note: i made you guys wait long enough hehe :) hope you like it, please let me know what you think! and please take notice of the warnings!! they are there for a reason <3
⥠series masterpost âĄ
Your nightmares have gotten better...somewhat. Better in the sense that you donât let them carry over as much to the next day. Better in the sense that now, there are seven smiling faces that greet you every morning to help the fear dissolve. But they still relent as strong as ever, and make you toss and turn every single night with no pity.Â
Theyâve gotten more frequent since that meeting with your father. More vivid. Some nights, your nightmares are so bad that you just end up migrating over to Taehyungâs room right next to you and sleeping on the edge of the bed (though you just end up wrapped around each other in the morning). Taehyung never bats an eye. Only opens the side of his thick duvet for you to crawl into and flicks on a lamp because he knows you donât like the dark after a nightmare.Â
Tonight is no different. From the other side of the wall, Taehyung can hear your pained whimpers and mumbles that he can barely make out. Your sheets rustle as your body protests the vivid dream, and he canât help but to bolt out of his comfortable position to check up on you. Youâre still deep in restless sleep when he opens the door and approaches your bed.Â
âY/N, sweetheart, please wake upâ, he soothes, caressing the side of your face with one hand. âItâs just a dream.â
The yellowing bruise on your cheek has begun to fade, but it still makes their blood boil every time they catch sight of it. Seeing it right now makes Taehyung want to burn the entire city down and your father along with it. But he is here for you. And Taehyung (and the other six) cannot be anything but soft towards you.Â
âBaby, wake upâ, he says again, louder this time and it makes you begin to stir out of sleep. You quiet at the contact of his skin but your eyes remain closed and that fitful frown is still on your face. Taehyung doesnât know that his mere presence brings you comfort. Even when youâre not conscious.Â
He takes the authority to nestle under the covers next to you and itâs as if your body just naturally gravitates to his, tucking yourself into his arms like a linking puzzle piece. Itâs a selfish reason, and Taehyung doesnât want to tell anyone, though he has a feeling the guys already know and also share his belief. But he secretly treasures the moments that he gets with you, even if it is for a heartbreaking reason such as nightmares.Â
He loves the feeling of your body next to his, and the blankets that get just a little too overheated because the both of you are human furnaces. He loves the gentle thud of your heartbeat on those nights that he holds you closer than normal, when you shake like a leaf through your dreams and he is your tether to the ground.Â
And to think, just a while ago he was yelling at you from the other side of the wall, complaining about your loud crying. He wants to go back in time and kick himself. Taehyungâs scared. Heâs never really cared for someone like this before.Â
You are already safely stowed away in his wide chest when a shadow walks by the room. Taehyung is not surprised when Yoongi creaks the bedroom door open, and not surprised when he sees Jimin in tow.Â
âWe heard her all the way from upstairs.â Yoongi mutters through a yawn. Jimin just sighs and looks at your sleeping figure with concern and longing. The two men shuffle into the room and as Jimin lifts up the blanket to flank your other side, Yoongi sets himself at the foot of the bed. Not that any of them lacked space, of course. The boys made sure your room was properly equipped with a large California king.Â
âItâs been getting worse. I donât know what to do. I want to help her, but I-âÂ
Taehyung finds himself getting choked up through his words. They all feel the same way. Itâs just that thereâs been too many nights where heâs had to hold your broken pieces together while you scream out the ghosts of what has happened to you. If itâs too much to bear for the seven of them, looking from the outside, they canât imagine how it must feel for you.Â
Jimin reaches over, your body nestled between the two of them, and inserts his hand inside Taehyungâs, caressing the thumb back and forth of his skin.Â
âI guess all we can do is be here on the nights that are difficult.â Yoongi tilts his head so that heâs looking at you, still drifting off in your dream with a pained expression on your face.
âSheâll get through this. Sheâs strong.âÂ
The words that Yoongi whispers into the night air of your bedroom are hopeful. Uncharacteristic for a man like him, but when it comes to you, optimism is the only choice. Heâll allow himself to have hope if itâs for you.Â
The four of you fall back into shallow sleep, and time passes by differently when itâs night time and your bones cry for rest. They fall in and out of consciousness for a minute or a couple hours, none of them are sure. All they can focus on is their worry, and you continue to battle through your war of bad dreams. Jimin and Taehyung awaken again when you begin to stir.
You quiver like youâre cold, even when youâre sandwiched in between two warm bodies and they both snuggle in to hold you even closer. But you remain lost to your nightmare and begin to cry tears that drip down and dampen the fabric of Taehyungâs pajama shirt. He knows youâll apologize profusely for that in the morning, but he couldnât give less of a damn about his shirt. The feeling of you crying in his arms makes him feel like an utter failure.Â
Jimin wipes away the wet trail that the tear left behind on your skin, and wants to cry himself. He doesnât know how to take your pain away, and wants to scream because sleep is the only time where you can truly rest and the universe deprives you of even that.Â
âIâm so sorry, princess. Weâre here.â He whispers to your unhearing ears. âWeâll be here.â
When your cries begin to get loud and your muttering becomes pained, the door is softly opened again. This time, it reveals a wide-awake Jungkook and a not so awake Hoseok. Yoongi rolls his eyes but canât help the fond smile that paints his lips.Â
âJungkook, I told you to stop staying up so late playing video games.â he whisper-scolds, and Jungkook looks sheepish in the lowlight of your bedroom. Theyâre not surprised by his late night antics by any means, and theyâre also not surprised that he abandoned them to check up on you. They all know Jungkook has an unreasonably tender spot for you.Â
âIs it her dreams again?â, Hoseok says, pure worry leaking out of every word and staring at your impossibly small self in Taehyungâs hold. Thereâs no annoyedness in his tone. Theyâre all just deathly concerned about you.Â
Pushing Hoseok inside the room and quietly closing the door behind him, Jungkook situates himself on the loveseat next to the bed, while Hoseok just plops on the plush rug, snatching a throw pillow and tucking it under his head. Jimin sweeps a stray hair away that had fallen into your face.Â
Though theyâre all trying to close their eyes and sleep, they all know that tonight will be a restless one. If you are not peacefully sleeping, they wonât be able to either. And it seems that that statement applies to all of them, when not even 10 minutes pass until Namjoon and Seokjin make their way to your bedroom, for the same reason as the other five. They wordlessly set out pillows and blankets on the floor beside your bed, nestling into each other for warmth and hoping that you can feel their sincerity even in sleep. And if anyone could see them now: big, bad mafia bosses cuddling together to help you through a night of bad dreams, Bangtan would force them to sign non-disclosure agreements. For you though, they could do this for hundreds of nights.Â
When all seven are there, you miraculously slumber peacefully through the night. For the first time since Taehyung crept into your room, you are resting comfortably, quiet and undisturbed. And when you start snoring, Taehyung wants to cry with sheer relief. It was as if your subconscious vied for the presence of all the boys, and now that you have it, they finally allow themselves to drift off as well.Â
The last thing you expected when you woke up this morning was to be dripping in sweat and much too aware of the extra three bodies on the bed with you. Ones you donât remember going to sleep with last night. You have no recollection, just remembered that you went to sleep alone and now the seven men youâve grown far too fond of were in the room with you, still snoozing the day away.Â
At the foot of your bed, Yoongi stretches his limbs and groans when the sunlight peaks through the curtains into his eyes. He squints away the sleep and smiles dopily at you from under a blanket. Hopefully he doesnât notice the way you practically melt at just his gaze.Â
âMorning, sweetheart.â His throaty morning voice makes you blush two shades of red.Â
âGood morningâ, you whisper back, not wanting to wake any of them up. They just look so adorable and so completely exhausted. Yoongi bets that all of them would rather forfeit their positions as mafia bosses before telling you itâs because they stayed up all night worrying about you. âUmâŠâ, you murmur, eyes darting around the room, âwhy are you all in here?âÂ
Yoongi doesnât know what to say. He doesnât want to admit how whipped they actually are for you.Â
âYou were...having bad nightmares. So we wanted to come make sure you were okay.âÂ
Your eyes widen at Yoongiâs confession, and it reminds you of when Namjoon had done the same for you all those nights ago. It makes your heart ache and bloom at the same time because well..no oneâs really cared enough to do something like this for you. Something so simple yet significant. You blink away the mistiness in your eyes, looking around the room once again.Â
Three of them are on your bed. The rest are distributed across the floor and Jungkookâs slung uncomfortably on a chair. When you look back at Yoongi, it seems like he already knows all the thoughts running through your head. He already knows the words you want to say, but donât know how to articulate.Â
âWeâll do this every night if we have to, Y/N. For as long as it takes.âÂ
You leap from your spot under the blankets to wrap Yoongi in a bear hug, burying your face in his shoulder as he buries his in your hair. Though you are overheated from the cuddling and still dazed from sleep, you hold him with as much sincerity as you can muster. You have a feeling he can tell when he holds you back just as warmly.Â
The movement makes Jimin and Taehyung wake in unison and as they rub the fatigue from their eyes and land on the sight of you perfectly swathed in Yoongiâs arms, the two of them think itâs a sight they could get used to waking up to. They wonder if you feel the same way.Â
âThank you.â Your words are airy and light in his ear, but Yoongi knows their true weight. He doesnât say anything. Just plants a soft kiss on the side of your temple and relishes in the scent of your shampoo.Â
When he stares past your shoulders, he meets the gaze of Jimin and Taehyung, who are fondly peering at the two of you. Years of being with each other, theyâve learned to communicate certain things without having to say anything. And right now, in the gentle morning light, the realization is beginning to seep in.Â
Perhaps the way they care about you is more what they had expected.Â
Living with the seven of them is an adjustment. Getting accustomed to a rhythm and routine in a house thatâs the headquarters of an underground powerhouse is easier said than done. You were constantly surrounded with uncertainty and tiptoeing danger but you had never felt unsafe. They were there. And as long as you had them, this house was sanctuary.Â
Youâre not in any immediate danger. Your father had basically agreed to leave you alone for the foreseeable future and the media had begun to calm down. However, when the tides have settled, the boys are able to see you up close and personal and at all the ugly scares youâve tried to hide from everyone. Theyâre able to see what those years of trauma has done to you.Â
Whenever someoneâs voice booms too loudly across the mansion, yelling orders at subordinates or for any other reason, you start to quiver like a leaf in the wind. When one of them reaches towards you too quickly, for simple things like a wave or to hold your hand, you canât help but to flinch in anticipation. And you try to hide it, but itâs impossible not to notice.Â
They notice everything.Â
They always do, when it comes to you.Â
With every mannerism and survival instinct that has been involuntarily drilled into your subconscious, they all grow angrier that youâve been subjected to this pain. Hoseok has had to talk Namjoon down from sending their entire fleet to dismantle the ambassador a couple too many times as they continue to learn how deep the trauma with your father truly runs.
âY/NâŠâ, Jin hesitantly mutters, fiddling with the food on his plate nervously, âhave you ever thought about...going to therapy?âÂ
You freeze in between a chew and swallow, eyes staring into his with an innocent deer-in-the-headlights expression. You look like you might have a panic attack, and Jin is quick to cut the tension.Â
âN-not that weâre forcing you to do it, my love. Itâs only a suggestion. Itâs just that..maybe it would be good for you. To talk about things and get professional help.â By the way he says it, and the way the other boys are staring at you expectantly, you realize this is something theyâve probably been discussing for a while now. And though itâs heartwarming to know that they care about your health, the idea of going to therapy is deathly daunting.Â
âI donât know, guysâŠâ You twist your hands in your lap, a nervous habit to show your discomfort and they all instantly regret bringing this up at all. You keep your gaze glued downwards. Youâre afraid that if you look up, youâll just see disappointment from the ones that youâve grown to care about so much. You donât think you could handle it.Â
âCould you look at us, Y/N?â Namjoonâs voice is soothing and there is no single trace of anger or frustration. You slowly tilt your head upwards and meet his eyes.Â
âAt the end of the day, you donât have to do anything you donât want to do. If you donât want therapy, then fuck therapy, princess.âÂ
Namjoon feels gratification when his statement makes you smile, and his heart suspiciously flutters in his chest.Â
âBut we just want the best for you. We all want you to heal becauseâŠâ, Namjoon looks around and makes eye contact with the rest of the boys, whom he knows share his same feelings.Â
âYouâre so important to us.âÂ
Youâve known this. You know that they care about you even when your mind forces you to doubt that anyone does. But when you hear it like this, so raw and unfiltered with sincerity leaking in every letter, it ignites something that you havenât felt in a long time.Â
Hope.Â
You take a glance next to you at Jungkook, whose warm smile makes your lungs feel like molten honey. At Yoongi, who looks back at you with gentle eyes. At Hoseok, who is impossibly soft with you. At them all. It makes you realize something:
You donât want to go to therapy. Itâs scary and youâre not really sure if you want to talk about your father or your family or anything that happened before you met Bangtan. But you have people who care about you now. And if you didnât want to do this for yourself, then, well... you would do it for them.Â
âYou donât have to decide now, but-â
âIâll do it.â Your voice slices through Taehyungâs words. âIâll go to therapy.â
âAre you sure, Y/N?â, Hoseok questions. Though he wants you to very badly, he wants you to do it on your own terms. And though your statement is strong, he can see the doubt and uncertainty swimming in your irises.Â
âNo, not really.â you whisper, and they practically deflate so you are quick to remedy their dejection.Â
âBut...I know that I want to get better. I know itâs going to be hard, but I want to get better.â You take a deep breath.
âFor you. All of you.âÂ
The room falls silent, and the noise of clinking cutlery against porcelain plates stills. They could only look at you and wonder what country they have saved in their past lifetime to deserve to stumble upon someone like you. Someone so wonderful, and so damaged but so determined to heal. For them. For all of them.Â
Jungkook scoops your hand in his, and when you look in his eyes, you are stunned to see that there are unshed tears pooling at his waterline. He looks at you and thereâs something in his gaze that you canât place. Something lovely that makes you feel like all this hurt has been worth it. Jungkook looks at you like there is something worth looking at.Â
âWe loveâŠâ From your other side, Jimin starts speaking, but cuts himself off halfway through and suspiciously glances around the table, meeting the gaze of the six other boys who already know how he wants to finish that sentence. But he doesnât.Â
âW-We love that you want to do that for usâ, he coughs, and you return it with a smile.Â
Did a part of you want him to say something different? Something deeper? Youâre not sure, but the tinge of disappointment in your stomach that follows his words is a sign.Â
Could you allow yourself to think that someone could actually genuinely like you past platonicity? Much less seven powerful men? After years of your father telling you the complete opposite, accompanying each scathing word with a bruise, itâs difficult to believe anything different.Â
Therapy was, in a word, completely exhausting. It was tiring dancing around the subject of your fatherâs abuse, your motherâs neglect, Soyeonâs blatant denial and just the complete package of being the eldest daughter to Ambassador Yoo. When they all had scheduled you for 4 sessions a week, you immediately wanted to decline and opt for one. But their eyes had all looked so hopeful. So excited for you to get professional help, and there was no possible way you could have turned them down.Â
Progress is frustratingly slow, though. Some days you just want to quit.
 You plop unceremoniously on the large plush sofa, grabbing the nearest throw pillow and cradling it to your chest. The boys are all in the other room, but are now fully aware of your presence after you slammed the front door and huffed your way to the comforting couch. They can practically feel the rays of stress emanating from you.Â
âY/N? Baby? Whatâs wrong?â Jimin is the one that first approaches, and the rest stare on with concern leaking out of every pore. And when you reply with a sniffle and hiccup, their hearts all collectively break.Â
You feel a dip in the couch and crane your neck to lock your teary eyes with Jiminâs, whose brows are deeply furrowed. You involuntarily launch into his arms, tucking your face into his neck, and inhaling his cologne that always manages to calm you down. You hear them all shuffle around you.Â
âItâs just..â, your voice pitifully cracks, âhard.â From your position, they are thankful you cannot see the heartbreak in their expression. Itâs so hard for them to see you as anything but happy.Â
âI donât know if I can do itâ, you breathe out, feeling a new wave of tears begin to rise. You want to cry even more at the thought that they would be more disappointed in you. .
But there is a warmth from your other side, and you donât know who it belongs to as it sits next to you.Â
âIâm so proud of you, Y/Nâ, Namjoon whispers oh-so-softly. They are such simple words. Arguably mundane and ordinary. Then why does it knock the wind right out of your chest? Why does it light up your dark tunnel? Heâs proud of you. They all are. Even when you are an emotional mess with low mental energy, Namjoon is sitting next to you and telling you that heâs proud.Â
You erupt into heart wrenching sobs that wonât seem to stop no matter what you do. Itâs the kind of cry that feels like a weight has been lifted off your chest. A cry that comes straight from your core and it sounds painful but truthfully, itâs just relieving. You know that all of them are worried out of their minds. You can feel it in the way Jimin shakily holds you as tight as he can, as if you are delicate chipped porcelain in his arms.Â
But this is how you rebuild. With the seven of them by your side. You tell Namjoon to cancel your future therapy sessions the next day. Your psychologist was far short of revolutionary, and when they all asked you why, you admit that itâs not the therapy thatâs helping you get better.Â
It was just them. Being around them. Talking to them.Â
It was Seokjin carding his hands through your hair and rubbing out the tension that always inevitably develops in your temples. It was Namjoon letting you lounge quietly in his office as he goes through paperwork, enjoying your presence as much as you enjoy his. It was Yoongi and Hoseok rambling to you about their adventures on the field (leaving out the gory details, of course. They wanted to keep you innocent and soft). It was Taehyung sneakily replacing your pink peonies as soon as the first petal began to wilt, even after the infinite amount of times you told him it was unnecessary. It was Jungkook and Jimin making excuses to spend the afternoon snuggled up on your bed when you all knew it was simply because they wanted to hold you.Â
It was all of them tiptoeing around affection, craftily sneaking in spare kisses and touches on the skin. Holding you a little longer than necessary, a little more tenderly. Intertwining your hands under the dinner table, or when their subordinates werenât looking.Â
You notice the way they blush more often, if you let your touch linger for too long, or if you brush past them and make skin contact. You notice how pet names are easier to spill from their lips; ones like: my love, honey, sweetheart, baby...and you canât help but to completely indulge in the way it is addressed only for you. Little ways to subliminally tell you that perhaps you meant more to them than they were ready to admit. And you would be lying if you said your feelings for the seven of them were completely platonic. You would be lying if you said love wasnât on the brain.Â
Perhaps you are the missing piece to a puzzle they hadnât realized was unfinished.Â
âHyung...I think I love her.â Jungkook is unsurprisingly the first one to voice it. The six others donât even bat an eye.Â
âNo, Jungkook. I know you love herâ, Hoseok whispers back in the tense silence of their meeting room. You are fast asleep on the floor above, but their hearts call out to you through the short distance.Â
âI am too. We all are.â It is a truth theyâve known for a while. Sooner than theyâre proud to admit.Â
âI guess now all we have to do is figure out how to tell her.âÂ
They did want to. Tell you, that is. They wanted to shout it from the rooftops and make it known to the world that you are the angel that has snatched their hearts without even realizing it herself. If it hadnât been for the disaster that suddenly struck their mafia, the boys would have already bared their souls to you. But timing was never kind.Â
Bangtan were not known to be gullible. Not known to be easily fooled. So when Taehyung ran into their meeting room, red-faced and clenching his fists so hard they turned white, the Judas in their gang had come as a scathing surprise.Â
One of their inner circle. Someone they had poured their trust and faith into, who had learned the system of their syndicate, had been a mole the entire time. Of course, they had disposed of him quickly, but the damage had already been done to their business. Allies and affiliates were backing away from collaboration in fear that Bangtan had been breached by law enforcement. Shipments were going missing more frequently, and even the lower hierarchies of their gang were beginning to become doubtful. To say the least, the seven of them were under debilitating stress and frustration.Â
Nowadays, things were different than before. You were mostly kept in the dark about their business but you knew that something had happened. Something to make them so wound up, and it worried you to no end. Itâs impossible not to notice how tense the house had become.Â
Taehyung no longer stops by your room late at night, and in the early hours of the morning, you can still hear the frustrated clacking of his keyboard from next door. Not that you needed him to help you through your nightmares, but...youâve gotten used to his comforting presence next to you.
Jungkook doesnât seek you out for random conversations, and Namjoon just completely disappears in his office most days, not sparing you a single glance when he does manage to show his face outside. He locks the door now. You take it as a strong message that you are no longer welcome, and it upsets you, but you understand they are going through a rough patch. Your job is to be the least bothersome person you could possibly be.Â
But Yoongi just flat out ignores you now, and you know Hoseok pretends to care about whatever topic of conversation you bring up. You can see right through his empty affirmations and nods. The kitchen is completely void of Jin, and there are no more clanging pots and pans when you try to cook for yourself. And Jimin is just like the rest of them: absent and indifferent to your presence.Â
You know that itâs not you. The problem on their plate is bigger than you, but it still feels like you are a walking, breathing burden. You know that itâs not you, but your mind tells you they donât want you here anymore. Theyâre sick of you.Â
Two weeks pass by, and theyâre still so cold even after all your attempts at trying to be calming comfort in their chaotic lives. They still talk to you, but itâs strictly refrained to small talk that feels obligatory and like they have better things to do than spend time with you. Theyâre so busy that you often find yourself hanging out alone in the garden or making light conversation with the maids, or gang rookies that hang around the mansion.Â
And it hurts to admit, but they donât notice when you begin to regress to your old behavior. They donât notice when you begin to flinch at anything that moves too quickly again, or the way you begin spacing out more than usual when you delve too far into your thoughts. They donât notice when your nightmares start worsening again, too busy in their pooling stress to hear you toss and turn late at night and emerge from your bedroom with red, sunken eyes in the morning. You are relapsing into the learned behavior from your father, and you are terrified to admit it to yourself. But after a particularly bad day of anxiety and panic attacks, you put your fear aside to talk to the boys again about going back to therapy. It was virtually pointless, but you wonât let the seven of them take the brunt of your mental health when they had so much going on already.Â
You timidly make your way down to the lower level of the mansion, slow footsteps leading you to their meeting room, where theyâre all engrossed in their work and you can feel the tension choking the air. None of them notice your presence at first, until you cough to get their attention. They all snap their heads up and stare.
âHey, could I um..talk to you guys for a couple minutes?â
 You feel like a specimen under a microscope. You used to be so comfortable talking to them. Now it just feels unnatural.Â
âCan it wait, Y/N? Weâve just lost another shipment, and itâs a big oneâ, Yoongi grumbles from his seat, rifling through a tall stack of papers with a permanent crease in his brows.Â
âOkay, then when can we-âÂ
âWeâre just really busy right now.âÂ
Jungkook doesnât mean for his voice to be so loud. He probably didnât even pay attention to it, but it makes you flinch and stumble backwards. Makes you melt more into the girl you used to be. The one who stayed quiet out of survival, diminishing under the authority of a loud voice with cruel intentions. You know he doesnât mean to do it. But you canât help but see the face of your father again, and those long-healed scars seem to re-flicker with pain.Â
Still, these were your boys. So you push on.Â
A deep breath. âI was just thinking that maybe I could go back to-â
âY/N, please. We donât even have enough time to breathe. Iâm sure whatever you need can be addressed later.â
The room falls into silence. Their message is loud and clear. And though it's painful to hear, itâs your own fault for exaggerating your place in their lives. He was right, it could be addressed later...you were just being a bother.Â
âRight. Sorry.â Your halfhearted mutter falls deaf on their ears. They havenât spared you a single ounce of attention, eyes still glued onto their work. You swallow down the heavy feeling in your throat and force the tears away. Why does your chest feel like someoneâs twisted up your heart?Â
Youâre always so sensitive, Y/N. Such a crybaby. You canât even take care of yourself.Â
The tread upstairs back to your bedroom feels like an arduous journey as you try to hold yourself together and pretend like their actions hadnât hurt you. But they werenât responsible for your trauma. Your problems. You couldnât blame them for not making it a priority, when their empire was threatened.Â
They donât hear you that night when you hold a goose-feather pillow to your chest and sob out the fear of being unwanted again. They donât show up at your bedroom door when you wake yourself up from crying through a nightmare.Â
Youâll figure it out yourself, with or without a therapist and with or without depending on them. From now on, you decide to make yourself invisible, focusing all your energy on dragging yourself out of the dark place youâre stuck in once again. So if you have to suffer in silence for their sake, so that they donât have another insignificant loose end to worry about, youâll do it. Itâs the least you can do.
But youâd come to learn that those words are easier said than done.Â
âMiss Y/N?â There is a light knock at your door, and the soft voice of the maid barely penetrates through the thick wood. You remember her name was Jun. The noise goes through in one ear and out of the other, and you canât even find it in yourself to reply.Â
âYou havenât left your room in two days. I was just...making sure youâre okay.â
Her statement shocks you out of your dazed stupor, and you hadnât even realized the amount of time you spent staring into space, limp on your mattress.
 It was getting harder. To just function and drag yourself out of your bedroom so you didnât, and two days unknowingly passed. But to you, they only felt like hours. Time passes by differently when youâre blindly navigating through trauma.Â
Itâs hard to sit up and slowly tread to the door, and your bones ache after not moving for so long. When you open it, guilt pools in your stomach to see her worried expression. Though you can guess why she looks so concerned. Youâre a complete disaster.Â
âOh, honeyâŠâ, she sighs, tucking a loose strand of hair behind your ear, âhere. Letâs get you into some fresh clothes.âÂ
You mindlessly let her help you out of your days old T-shirt and sweats, mindlessly let her guide you into the shower and turn on the water, mindlessly let her rub shampoo into your scalp. You donât even have the energy to open your mouth and tell her the waterâs too cold. Youâre still stuck inside your own thoughts, and you can only hear your fatherâs voice in your ear as he repeatedly affirms how worthless you are. Useless Y/N, thatâs what he would say. Good-for-nothing Y/N.Â
Youâve somehow gotten it into your head that the reason why theyâve been so absent with you is because they donât know to tell you they want you to leave. After all, staying in the Bangtan mansion was only supposed to be a temporary solution. Maybe this is how they kick you out.Â
When Jun wraps you in a fluffy towel and drags you out from underneath the showerhead, you catch a glimpse of yourself in the mirror. Your cheeks are sunken, and the dark circles under your eyes look almost painful. And somewhere along with that reflection is the image of your father. His angry face, glaring at you and screaming why you let yourself get like this.Â
âJun, have theyâŠare they still busy?â Her eyes widen at the first words sheâs heard from you, but there is sad sympathy on her face in a split second and youâve already gotten your answer before she can say anything.Â
âYes, dear. The bosses are very occupied. But they can always make time for you, hm? They care about you a lot, you know.â Junâs statement makes you frown, but you donât retort. Maybe you used to think that they cared, but now it just felt like their kindness was out of obligation. They felt guilty for sending you back to your father. Or perhaps they used to care for you. But now...you werenât so sure.Â
When she manages to get you downstairs, in the kitchen, and set you in front of a bowl of soup, the boys are nowhere to be found. Jun tells you theyâre out doing business and you tell yourself youâre not hurt that they hadnât even noticed your absence for the past two days.Â
Theyâre just roped up in other things, thatâs all.Â
After your shower and meal, Jun insisted that you take a stroll around the garden, and specifically instructed you to check out the new peony bush she had just planted. She mentioned it was per request of the seven bosses, but you had a hard time believing any of them would be concerned with something like that during this time. They hadnât even made the time to talk to you.Â
You hadnât realized how much you needed to be outside and breathe in fresh air until you stepped out into the grassy space. Even though the solitude was getting to be too much, you were experiencing a newfound peace that you wanted to keep for as long as possible. Jun was right, and the peony bush was absolutely gorgeous. You actually feel like an alive and functioning human being. It was surprising that you were so dependent on the boys that without them, falling apart was inevitable. But now you were coherent and not so drowned in your toxic mentality (youâll have to thank Jun profusely later), and you feel determined to talk to them again. About going back to therapy, no matter how useless it felt back then, and try to get on your own two feet. Now that you had seen and felt how serious it was, you wouldnât be so complicit if they tried to silence you.Â
From over the tall hedges, the sounds of wheels rolling on gravel could be heard before the tense slams of car doors. The sound of Jungkook and Namjoonâs low muttering falls on your ears and though it sparks excitement inside you, youâre also fearful of what they might say. You donât think you can handle another swift rejection like last time. Their indecipherable conversation ceases when you hear the entrance doors close, and seal them inside while you are still out here in your own world.Â
The white peony thatâs cupped in your hand feels so fragile and soft that you donât want to touch it anymore. It makes you think of them. Of how delicate it feels recently and how youâre so deathly afraid of them changing their minds one day and kicking you out with nowhere to go. Maybe youâll just wander around again. Thereâs a distant cousin in the states also, but youâd have to figure out how to get out of the country without alerting your father. You shake yourself out of your intrusive thoughts.Â
No way your boys would do that to you.
Right?
The way back from the garden to the house is brief, but your anxiety about talking to them lengthens the trips and the feet feel like miles. You are wrapped up in your thoughts the entire way, and when you make your way into the house, you almost donât notice the angry voices that are bouncing off the walls. It sounds like Taehyung is yelling, and the sound curdles your stomach. You hate it when people yell. It just reminds you of your father.Â
You follow the commotion to the kitchen, extra cautious and apprehensive. The sheer volume of their reprimanding seems to shake the house and your hands begin to quiver as you get closer. Peeking out from behind a wall, their backs are to you but you can see the face of a sheepish boy who hangs his head, gaze glued to the floor as the seven men continue to berate him. You recognize him as one of the newer members that was initiated a couple weeks ago; youâve talked to him a couple times and he was never anything but courteous. He looks like heâs about to cry and it makes your heart ache.
Your attention pans back to the seven out of shock. The only time youâve seen them this angry was at the meeting with your father, so you can only imagine what that young boy has done to land himself in this position.Â
âI told you a fucking million times too many, Lee. I told you to check in with the shipments as soon as they arrived in Myeongdong. So imagine my fucking surprise when I get a call notifying me that theyâre all missing. Stolen.â Namjoonâs voice cuts straight through the room. His fists are clenched and even from the back, you can tell the expression on his face is one of scalding fury.Â
A shipment? Theyâre this infuriated over a shipment?
âI-Iâm sorry, Boss. Please, I...please forgive me. I know itâs no excuse but Iâm new here, a-and I swear this will not happen again.â He shrinks into himself and you quietly whimper in sympathy.Â
Yoongi humorlessly chuckles. âYou swear? The only valuable thing you have to swear on is your life. And even thatâs not worth much.âÂ
Itâs moments like these that you forget how cruel and ruthless they can be. Theyâve always been so soft and gentle with you before, you forget they are mafia bosses overseeing an entire empire. That theyâve gotten here for a reason. You forget that people fear them. But you remember now.Â
Lee stays silent and still refuses to look up, but you can see the way his knees shake uncontrollably. He is one person standing up against 7 huffing bulls, so angry they canât see straight so if you - tiny and meek you - has to be the one to come to his defense, so be it.Â
Because youâve been that person going head to head with a bull. You see yourself, terrified and regretful, in Lee. And youâll be damned if you have to watch and not do anything about it. Your heart beats thunderously in your chest but you push past the fear.Â
Their heads all snap up in surprise when you march into the kitchen and stand in between them and the boy, who looks even more painfully young up close and sporting that deer-in-the-headlights expression. You lock gazes with each of them, swallowing your nerves before speaking.Â
âIs it really that big of a deal to yell at him like this? Look at himâ, you gesture to the cowering person behind you, âdonât you think heâs had enough?â Your voice is still soft, and such a contrast to their angry ones. But it seems like your gentle tone just makes them even angrier, and snaps them out of their initial shock. Â
âA big deal? He cost us thousands in shipments! Iâd say thatâs a pretty big fucking deal to me, Y/N.â Jungkook bursts out, exasperatedly running his hands through his hair and looking at you with an angry frown. You flinch at his volume. The stress on their shoulders is more apparent than ever. Â
âWhy are you defending him, Y/N? You donât even know who he isâ, Jimin spits, growing even more irritated. Thereâs a hint of jealousy in his words and itâs so subtle that you donât even notice it.Â
âI know that he doesnât deserve to be yelled at like this for a little mistake. One that Iâm sure he is regretful of making.â It suddenly feels daunting when you realize that youâre going up against all of them, and now, theyâre all staring at you with the same anger that was meant for the one that messed up their shipments.Â
âAnd what if that mistake is a sign that heâs traitorous? Hell, I wouldnât be surprised. Seems like thatâs a trend going around here.â From behind you, Lee is quick to open his mouth and begin to protest, but you interrupt and speak strongly. It seems this disciplining session has morphed into a full blown argument between you and them.Â
âIt was one person. I get that itâs shitty, and Iâm sorry it happened. I understand that you have to be on watch now and extra cautious. I do.â You sigh, a pleading look in your eyes but they remain stone cold.
âBut one person did that. Are you going to treat everyone like they betrayed you? Are you going to treat me like I betrayed you?â
âI donât know Y/N, you were so quick to defend him. Maybe you did. I wouldn't put it past you.âÂ
Taehyungâs words run through you like a hot knife to butter. You almost stagger back at the shock. Youâre no stranger to hurtful words but when they are coming out of his mouth, it hurts tenfold. How could they think you would betray them?Â
They promised to trust you, didnât they? They promise theyâd believe you after they failed to the first time. Now it just feels like youâre that spoiled little rich girl again in their eyes, standing in front of them and pleading your innocence.Â
âW-what? No, I-â
âYou know nothing about our world, Y/N. You canât possibly understand.â Jinâs silver voice is colder than youâre ever heard it.Â
âI know that, but could you just please-â
âAs a matter of fact, this is a mafia business matterâ, Yoongi shoots, poisoned words designed to hurt.Â
âIâm not sure why youâre here at all, Y/N. Just leave.âÂ
Gone is the strong persona that you had put up to protect this young boy. Gone is the confident woman who thought she had the will to stand up for herself, much less someone else. You can only keep your eyes glued to Yoongi, and hope that he doesnât see your heart crumbling right in front of him. How had he aimed mindlessly at your insecurities, and shot a bullseye into the biggest one?
Maybe you did, Y/N. I wouldnât put it past you.
Blame it on the blurriness through your tears or the sheer shock running through your veins, but you canât find one smidgen of regret or guilt in his expression. On any of their faces. Just anger and annoyance, aimed directly at you. And suddenly the spacious mansion feels all too suffocating.Â
You know nothing about our world Y/N.
The words you plan to say die on the tip of your tongue, as quickly as they came. There is nothing that comes out and in the aching silence of it all, the way you maintain eye contact with each of them speaks volumes. Yet they are blind to the way you are ripping at the seams, and oblivious to the turmoil they are putting you through. The coldness of their gaze and words shoot through your core, like a blade of ice piercing through your heart.Â
Iâm not sure why youâre here at all.Â
Just leave.Â
In short, right at this moment, they look like strangers. Strangers who know what scares you, what foods you donât like, your favorite flowers, your favorite color. Strangers who have seen your heart, welcomed it, and who were now crushing it in front of you.Â
What a fool you were to think that they could reciprocate your feelings.Â
What a fool you were to think that they wanted you as much as you wanted them.Â
Your pained chuckle is a discordant sound in the tense quiet. Their stares burn on your skin and though you are trying so hard to now show how utterly broken you feel, you wonder if they even notice. when you look back into the eyes of the boy directly in front of you, he is still so angry and red you find it hard to believe anything but your alleged cold, hard truth:
The seven boys you have fallen in love with utterly despise you. Perhaps they always have.Â
âYeahâ, you whisper brokenly. âMaybe I will.âÂ
taglist:Â @pinkyhimâ, @deollyâ, @loveyoonglesâ, @drunkzseokâ, @hope122598â, @uwunamjoonâ, @nomimits7â, @bubblebunnyliaâ, @aquaalanahâ, @juliie-ocha, @daydreambrlieverâ, @btsbabbyâ, @blank-et-noir, @myheartstaysinkorea, @rosiethefairyâ, @tiredjedi, @lovemyself-personaâ, @jeoncookie-btsâ, @annoyingpessimistâ, @beach-bitch-bitch-beachâ, @fangirling-all-the-way-tbh, @btstxtgenreâ, @taesugaarâ, @hxsxxk-180294â, @bubbletae7â, @uglyratlmaoâ, @hopetookmysoulâ, @supertweetycherryâ, @missseouliteâ, @barbikatherineâ, @jamesfrickingbuchananbarnesâ, @sunsetsnsirens-blogâ, @vanilla-smashâ, @lmaosaniâ, @onionhaseyeoâ, @i-dumb-bitchâ, @euphxriajoonâ, @justpeachyjoonâ, @dabbingangelsâ, @h5naaaâ, @parkmaeri, @softescapismâ, @bena-babyâ, @myjiminmychimchim , @moments-of-melancholyâ, @krystle1990â, @chatsgotmytongueâ, @vi-hoshiâ, @unlikelylittlemissâ, @rosey-roseau, @thestrugglesofateenagedirtbagâ, @kookiebbyxxâ,
#bts guild#bts mafia au#bts gang au#bts series#poly bts x reader#bts polyamory#bts poly au#ot7 x reader#ot7#bts fanfiction#bts fanfic#bts writing#bts angst#bts fluff#bts x reader#rm x reader#bts reader insert#jin x reader#suga x reader#jhope x reader#jimin x reader#seokjin x reader#namjoon x reader#yoongi x reader#hoseok x reader#taehyung x reader#jungkook x reader#kim namjoon#kim seokjin#jeon jungkook
902 notes
·
View notes
Text
YELLOW DAISIES (A. MIYA) pairing: miya atsumu x fem!reader
![Tumblr media](https://64.media.tumblr.com/7323a255694b7e3aa1735928138522f4/f185ee0b72524f50-cc/s540x810/4f48139eee445c01d8413d4ea1716d4c145a69e6.jpg)
synopsis: atsumu miya, japanâs most entitled player, the person that strangers resented for unprecedented boasting and confidenceâa facade as there was only one person who knew the real him.
word count: 1.6k
genre: established relationship, fluff, time skip
warnings:Â slight angst, asshole!atsumu?, hospital, mentions of death
![Tumblr media](https://64.media.tumblr.com/06b8d2defa8a92b8ef022db9069c1dbf/f185ee0b72524f50-43/s540x810/d0f63911227e8b0adab78d7497993536e2139377.jpg)
notes:Â iâm only on episode two of season four so iâve literally never heard this man speak a word, but i wrote this for some reason asjdfkl
âł DIRECTORY
![Tumblr media](https://64.media.tumblr.com/06b8d2defa8a92b8ef022db9069c1dbf/f185ee0b72524f50-43/s540x810/d0f63911227e8b0adab78d7497993536e2139377.jpg)
He was revolutionaryâthat was what flashed in bright lights in the media, magazines, and news when the name Miya Atsumu came into the picture. It was an honorable title, one that heâd earned from his years of experience, years of effort to become the best player he could possibly be.Â
Fans of the game couldnât help but admire his ambition, his confidence when it came to settingâwhen it came to being on the court. There was nowhere else he seemed to fit, no where else that deemed worthy of a man like him.
He was simply made to play volleyball, he was put on the planet to coordinate the team and help lead them to their respective victories. The drive he had was envious, admirable even to professionals that were years ahead of him in experience.Â
But there was a catch, just as there always seemed to be a catch when things appear too perfect or other-worldly, as Miya Atsumu was considered the most egocentric man in all of Japan.Â
Yes, his talent was astonishing and his looks trumped some of the most handsome men in the world, but he was a complete and utter narcissist to the public eye. A complete asshole in all senses of empathy.Â
He was perhaps an enigma. A man that no one person could quite figure out. A total mystery to everyone but those close to himâto everyone but his twin-brother and the few teammates that he considered friends.
And it wasnât that the public wanted to hate him, they wanted nothing more than to find a redeeming quality, something that would save his reputationâthe ignorant reputation that heâd somehow managed to build himself over the course of his professional career.
Tabloids constantly had new headlines to publish, weekly reports on whatever star-born attitude Atsumu had acted on in public, during games, or even in the safety of the teamâs after partiesâparties that heâd rarely be found at.
The most common hate train would be the look heâd give the camera every time he so much as scored a point mid-match. The cocky, full of himself gaze to the viewers watching at home, as if to say that he was the real King of the Court.Â
Holding up his hands in the shape of a heart, Atsumu would smile with a smug grin, teeth flashing white and sticking his tongue out dramatically. Heâd hold the position for a few seconds, making sure that the camera got a good take of his face, before returning to the adrenaline rush of the game.
It was as if he became an even better player after his boastful routine, focusing on the game as if it was life or death, as if he would be ruined if they were to lose a single pointâfrightening the other team with one glance, one look forcing them to crumble underneath their own dead weight.
With his rare intimidating attitude, the Black Jackals had little to nothing to worry about when it came to their setter. He was reliable, always there to pick up the slack when all odds seemed to be against themâwhen the books refused to read in their favor.
And his teammates absolutely loved him, they knew him better than nearly anyone other than Osamu. When microphones and interviewers shoved misguided questions in their faces, theyâd always defend him, as they were more than just players on the same side of the courtâthey were practically brothers.
So, when itâd be time to stay after the game to greet the fans, give them kisses on the cheek while the camera cemented their meeting in history, his friends paid no mind to how quickly Atsumu would rush out of the building. Theyâd pay no attention to how heâd refuse to entertain his fans, only stopping for one girlâone girl whoâd offered him a bouquet of bright yellow daisies.Â
âThank you.â Heâd mutter, nodding his head at the young girl before stalking off, ignoring how she fawned over the beauty of his facial features, obsessing over the way heâd just so much as acknowledged her existence.Â
Pulling out of the stadiumâs parking lot was always a big hassle, with the media and paparazzi awaiting his exit, video cameras taping his every move and step he took. There was zero privacy for him, every one of his secrets always seeming to be on film.
But Atsumu didnât care, he didnât mind running over a few parking cones, forcing the photographers to jump out of his carâs way, back onto the sidewalk where they belonged. He had absolutely no disregard for their safety according to the newâs titles.
As well as no respect to traffic laws. Speeding limits was a thing of the past in his mind, always going about twenty miles over, whether that was on a highway or neighborhood street. His life ran on double time, needing to be in a rush, a rush away from his duties.
His sports car headed north on the daily, never straying from its path, in pursuit of the same destination every dayâevery time he had the chance to escape the responsibilities of being a world-known athlete.
And though the world liked to act as if they knew everything about him, as if he was an open book whose chapters were updated every week, no one knew why Atsumu would spend so much time at the international hospital. Why heâd enter the building in the evenings and leave at dawn.
Even today, after the loss of a championship match, he wore the brightest smile on his face while holding a massive bouquet of yellow daisiesâthe flower thatâd always accompany him through the blank grey walls of the healing center.
The grin would stay plastered, the expression reading ingenuity as heâd walk through the automatic doors, taking a final glance back to make sure that no one had followed him, before letting the facade crumbleâbefore he let it dissolve into a somber frown.Â
âLooking beautiful as always.â Atsumu laughed, waltzing up to the front desk, greeting his favorite worker as she rolled her eyes, passing him the check in sheet with a pointed look. âHowâs my girl doing?â
The woman behind the counter took a deep breath, inspecting his signature to ensure that he hadnât signed in the wrong place, before looking up to respond to his questionâthe same question that he asked her every day.
âWaiting for you.â She said, gesturing that everything was alright and he could proceed to the dual elevators that carried him to the top floor, the floor in which permanent residents stayed. âSheâs up there waiting, just like she always is.â
Blowing the clerk a joking kiss, Atsumu carried on, holding the bouquet with a death grip, picking at the flowers to make sure that they looked their absolute bestâthat they deserved to be held in his favorite girlâs hands.Â
Standing in the elevator, his heart dropped at each ding. It was a sound that he had never gotten used to, one that haunted him as he slept, taunting him as if to say that the minutes were counting downâthe minutes losing their value, the minutes he had left with her decreasing.Â
Despite how much he loathed the noise, how he wished he could shut it all off, make time stop just so he could have an infinite amount of moments by her sideâhe knew that life would come to the point in which heâd hear that sound one last time. A point in which heâd leave the building and never have a reason to return.Â
As he approached the room he knew all too well, Atsumu brought his hand up to a light knock on the door, giving her a little heads up that he was there, that he didnât forget about her even though heâd maintained his constant routine for months now.Â
âIs that the famous Miya Atsumu I hear?â Y/Nâs melodious voice called out, knowing all too well that her beloved boyfriend had arrived to harass her. Her already enlarged heart grew bigger at the sight of his brown eyes and golden hair that sheâd always try to spot on the court.
While the world admired him for his physical beauty, she knew him for the beauty inside. The beauty that she was so blessed to see, the real personality that was reserved for her and her aloneânot even Osamu had seen him so gentle, so caring.Â
âYer favorites,â he held out the bouquet to her in a regal manner, presenting it as if she were a queen and it was her crown. His dramatics sent her into a fit of giggles, accepting the flowers with a scoff as he rose up to press a soft kiss on her awaiting lips.Â
âI saw you.â She whispered, pulling him down to meet her smile once more, relishing in the feeling of their love connecting. It was a feeling that she was addicted to, one that she longed for whenever he was away. âI saw you and the stupid little heart that you flash me on television.â
Atsumu helped her move over on the hospital bed, making enough room for him to lay down beside her as he wrapped an arm around her shoulder, his head resting on top of hers. âStupid? You sound like the rest of âem.â
âNo one would be calling it stupid if they knew what it meant.â He pinched her cheeks, puckering her lips to a pout and kissing her over and over again. âIf they knew I only do it because I want my girl to be proud of me.â
He sighed, holding her as if she would disappear if he let go, his fear of losing her of greater importance than any public opinion or false story. His fears being valid and reasonable as neither of them knew how much time they had leftâhow much time they had left to be totally and completely in love.Â
![Tumblr media](https://64.media.tumblr.com/06b8d2defa8a92b8ef022db9069c1dbf/f185ee0b72524f50-43/s540x810/d0f63911227e8b0adab78d7497993536e2139377.jpg)
© aitarose.tumblr 2021. do not copy or claim my writing, works, themes, copy and paste my words, or headers as your own
#atsumu#atsumu miya#miya atsumu#miya#miya twins#atsumu x reader#atsumu x y/n#atsumu x you#atsumu fanfiction#atsumu fanfic#atsumu fic#atsumu oneshot#atsumu oneshots#atsumu blurb#atsumu imagine#atsumu blurbs#atsumu imagines#atsumu fluff#atsumu angst#haikyuu#haikyuu x reader#haikyuu fanfiction#haikyuu fanfic#haikyuu fic#angst#oneshot#kioku#kioku fic#amnesia#au
178 notes
·
View notes
Text
What Jennie is like in a relationship/ Relationship with G-Dragon Tarot reading
![Tumblr media](https://64.media.tumblr.com/1a925867802a2d508c5e3ebe13b81ec1/7e1aaeb9f99c4198-3a/s540x810/58711cb51cee702e02b6c0642d36f5d5212ce470.jpg)
![Tumblr media](https://64.media.tumblr.com/e60189977ba0ddd8e7bd669bf27b5244/7e1aaeb9f99c4198-7e/s540x810/92e45eba1cac7b52ae736a7781cd74f72c49a0d0.jpg)
I know the anon asked for just a love life reading on Jennie but Iâm extra and did everything lmao
What is the true nature of Jennieâs relationship with gdragon? Gloominous doom reversed 56, ace of swords, the hanged man reversed, lady of masks, triumph of lies, the glanconer 62 reversed
Oh god lmao. I donât know why but I get the feeling this ârelationshipâ is just for GD to be back on good terms with the korean general public. He got flack for smoking weed before, seungri shit, abandoning his dog, dating kiko etc etc. I really feel like him dating Jennie is just so the public has a better opinion of him when he decides to have a comeback lmao. Anyway the true nature of this relationship is literally someone full of extreme self pity had an idea to do this because it will make them look better and vice versa. But now thereâs a feeling of being trapped. I really think this is an orchestrated relationship that was rushed and not based on actual love but for a specific purpose. But I do think itâs legit in the sense that itâs not that theyâre not dating at all. But since Yg didnât deny anything we can tell itâs ârealâ. Yg always denies if itâs definitely not a real relationship and always stays vague when itâs real. Itâs made to look real for the public to get them talking but the core itself isnât real. Basically pr shit. idc even if they got married none of this is real lmao.
I pulled 2 more cards from 2 different decks for extra clarification and I got the lady of masks and triumph of lies. You canât make this up lol. âShe reshapes the physical appearance of the souls who seek her out but this change is pure vanity, changing nothing of who they are at the coreâ it basically reflects who you want to be. This relationship is to make both parties look better lol. I feel that this is also a double meaning geared towards Jennie only because later cards in this reading continuously mention her wearing a mask. Triumph of lies is about keeping up appearances. This relationship is about living up to the expectations that society wants from you. I feel like itâs not just what people in the company want but also could be friends and family who put pressure on making this relationship happen for both. I can really see that since GD has a past of dating mostly models and the public has always been negative about everyone heâs dated except Jennie since she has a better reputation and for her this relationship can boost her status even more dating the king of kpop and being a power couple. I pulled a last card just to ask why you would need to fake a whole relationship even though we already know at this point and itâs redundant but I wanted to see how many times I can get cards saying the same shit. The glanconer 62 reversed: basically AGAIN someone is pretending to be other than they really are. I think both of them even believe in their own lie at this point and idk thereâs a level of thinking youâre better than others so itâs okay to fool them anyway. Whatever makes you look good.
Who is Jennie in this/ her shadow aspect: obsession 3, gd: today for tomorrow 32
Since the beginning cards were pretty negative I wanted to dive deeper into Jennie and GDâs shadow aspects. And just use these cards to differentiate between them. GD is today for tomorrow and for Jennie I got obsession. The biggest shadow aspect to Jennie is that she feels as if she needs something whether that be a person, an idea, an object etc to give meaning to her life. She can also become really fixated on things to the point where that is the entire focal point of her life. It numbs her attention to other things.
How does Jennie feel about gd and how does he feel about her? Solus 13, the high priestess, the hierophant, gd: the guardian at the gate 3, queen of wands reversed, the fool
Jennie: Jennie feels that GD is someone who when you donât know who to turn to or what to do, he is the person who can help you out. He encourages you stand on your own feet and utilize your own wisdom. But he also recognizes that you canât do everything on your own so he helps you make the right connections with the right people and basically like a mentor position. I feel like they both almost see this connection as something âdivineâ at least in the beginning they couldâve convinced themselves this was this big divine intervention. But the reality started to set in and Jennie saw a different side of someone who has lost touch and went from being someone to look up to to becoming more âcorruptedâ. He no longer practices what he preaches, thereâs lies mixed in with truth and the lines between right and wrong became more blurred. He does what he can to stay in power.
GD: He feels that Jennie is a new opportunity for a huge change. Sheâll help provide an opportunity for him to make a big shift in his life. But at the same time he feels like sheâs guarding herself and not being authentic with him. âWearing masks that do not fit youâ. I think heâs seen her change moods often from not figuring out how to release her passion and creativity in a healthy way and become more jealous and wanting to tear down others when sheâs feeling down. Cause the queen of wands would be stepping in your power not hiding behind anything and appearing exactly how you are. Reversed it can bring out bring dramatic and feeling out of control of your own life and lack of enthusiasm. I think heâs seen her lose her passion for even being in the industry itself. I think thatâs heâs wanting to take a leap of faith into something new I donât know if he would want to stay in this ârelationshipâ but Iâm seeing it more of him going off on his own and stop worrying about the fear of the unknown. Honestly both seem like a hot mess for each other thereâs a lot of work they gotta do on themselves separately because this whole connection is weird and toxic.
How long does it take her to get into a relationship? Does she prefer long or short term relationships? Princess of pentacles, 3 of swords, queen of swords 5 of wands reversed, 2 of wands, temperance reversed
Sheâs always been observant and was careful before in the beginning of relationships but no amount of carefulness canât prevent heartbreak. It kind of hardened her and she learned how to play the game so to speak. The fact that the queen of swords is holding a severed head tells you all you need to know what happens if you break her heart. She seems burnout with relationships but at the same time canât stop herself from not being in one because then youâll be alone with your demons. I think she does prefer long term relationships but Jennie seems to go from one extreme to another. She plans for the long term but she also canât control her emotions because theyâre so intense. Sheâll sabotage it and rush into a relationship with someone because sheâs already planning this whole future and the other person is like âuhhh we just met..?â I think she builds up a fantasy in her head and gets carried away at times. And thatâs where a lot of conflict and arguments arise and the cycle continues.
Past and present relationships. past: firgun 10 magick of you oracle, 2 of pentacles, Present: Euphoria 9, 5 of cups
I hate this word but I feel like in her past relationships she felt like the person she was with was her âtwin flameâ. This person was her mirror basically, every little thing she was and did was mirrored back to her. It was about learning how to heal the anger and hurt and learn to be happy for others success. But the relationship itself was a constant act of balancing career and love and all the ups and downs. It seems like even in her present love life she is still lingering over past relationships and now hides her actual feelings. Thereâs a lot of mask imagery in this whole reading. And not seeing everything you already have but being consumed with the thoughts of what went wrong or why it isnât this way. And no longer sharing your true self fully. Instead thereâs an element of not her not taking care of herself physically. Sharing herself intimately with people who treat her like garbage, poor eating, dragging yourself through workouts, excess of toxic substances; these are examples.
What is she like in a relationship? Eternal servitor, 10 of pentacles reversed, the lady of the harvest 18 reversed, the singer of intuition 7
This imagery of a person with no face and a whole in its chest really stands out to me again. It seems that when Jennie is in a relationship she still hides her true self and is constantly on a never ending search to fill something in herself that she feels is lacking. I think she uses money, clothing, love itself as a way to distract herself from this emptiness she feels inside and each time she wants more and more. Like she has to upgrade to the next biggest thing and it traps her in an infinite loop of never being satisfied. Idk but I guess itâs her wanting the world to see her importance; if she has these things then she is now worthy and it gives her a feeling of purpose. Itâs not just the pressure of herself needing the best âthingâ but a loooot of pressure from family and others to find a âsuitableâ partner. They need to come from the right background, make this amount of money, etc so her family can show off how wonderful this partner is and how amazing Jennie is doing. Even the next card âthe lady of the harvestâ reversed speaks of this again. Itâs crazy how almost all of the cards are just saying the same thing. Itâs about staying in denial and refusing to accept a loss and cling onto pain instead. Jennie is the type of person who thinks âif I canât have it, no one willâ. When she sees something she wants and canât get it she will go into destruction mode because she feels that itâs the only solution. Sheâs not a forgive and forget person. A line in this guidebook really stands out to me âif you love something, let it go. If it doesnât come back, hunt it down and kill it.â Pretty much sums up her mentality. Even if she enters a new relationship her mind is consumed by the past and the present relationship is only to save face and show off the image she tries to create to please literally everyone except herself. I think sheâs very perceptive and can know someone who sheâs with inside and out. Sheâs also very aware of the image she needs to uphold. Thereâs pretty much nothing you can hide from her because her intuition is so strong.
What is her "type"? the piper 24, 8 of wands reversed, TaâOm the poet 29, Arthur
Letâs get the obvious out of the way: she likes musicians. Also the fact that this is legit the only faerie in this 66 card deck playing an instrument so what are the odds. She appreciates someone who pays attention to the subtle expressions of feelings and ideas and can see into her soul basically. Itâs communication without words and that makes music that can heal your sorrows and pains. Someone that listens to not just surface level words but to the deeper meaning that can only be heard with your heart. Seductive, someone who looks serious but is actually mischievous and fun.
He encourages you to unfold your wings and fly, do the things youâre afraid to do, stop being silent and speak up, have a youthful spirit and do the thing youâve been putting off for so long. He has a lust for life, adventure, an excellent storyteller and writing skills and a huge imagination. He has the power to inspire action with just his words. He sees things as they really are and sees beauty in all things even in the darkness and difficulty of life. He doesnât take life so seriously though he knows how to laugh at himself and knows how silly it is to be sad over hardships in life. He doesnât care for societyâs expectations heâs a free spirit. But at the same time he slows down and knows how to enjoy the journey and not rush by the seat of his pants. Heâs someone thatâll stand the test of time and be by her side through thick and thin.
What is her love language? Myk the myomancer 42, the oak men 47, 10 of wands
Idk if this really fits into any of the âofficialâlove languages but her love language is someone seeing the small details, seeing meaning in the little things. So maybe little gifts even that donât have to be huge but just shows that youâve paid attention to what she likes as long as it has meaning and is well thought out. When you canât see the finish line and it looks like itâs impossible to keep going that person is there to have your back. Also someone that sees her for who she truly is in her heart and can look past the superficial hard exterior cause Iâm pretty sure itâs just a defense mechanism mixed with the environment she grew up and past relationships and sheâs not actually the Antichrist contrary to how negative this reading may seem.
Probably typos but whateves
#kpop tarot#blackpink tarot#blackpink jennie#kpop readings#kpop predictions#kpop#jennie kim#g dragon#free tarot#free tarot readings#kpop tarot reading#blackpink#tarot reading#tarot love#blackpink astrology#tarot cards#oracle cards#kpop astrology#blackpink tarot reading
110 notes
·
View notes
Text
Sindria's Prophet #09
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[AO3]
**stream of consciousness
~POV shift~
King Sinbad was stuck awake lamenting that he wasn't able to check on to his Prophet. Mori had stayed hidden in the sleeping quarters since they left. From the little anyone did see her, she wasn't well, and refused most help. They didn't know what illness she had -Sinbad hoped it was just stress induced- but they had been able to pass her pain killers without her making a fuss.
When Mori had first let them know she was brought there against her will, he had hoped that it was a welcome change, but of course it wasn't that simple, and she was clearly grappling with guilt after what happened in Balbadd.
Sinbad knew what it was like to loose many important people and your home all at once, and to bare the weight of many lives. He hoped she would feel better in a few months. It had taken him a year to feel like he could return after the Fall of First Sindria. It was a shame though. He had been planning to take her with him to the Kou Empire. If nothing else, King Sinbad had wanted to introduce her to the rest of his Generals before leaving for the Kou Empire.
There was no way to know when she would be ready to appear before anyone again. At least she would be in his care.
Mori had told Aladdin that she couldn't read Fate anymore so her predictions were going to become less accurate as they changed Fate. She was signing on as his Prophet, but this might not be cause for concern. The Fate she had hinted at was a bleak one; if things stop lining up with her predictions it should mean they had avoided that Fate. Even if this made her less useful in the long run, Mori could also feel the waves of Fate, so he had no intentions of ever letting her go even after she ran out of prophecies.
This was just another reason why he needed to gain her loyalty. How else would he be able to keep her from leaving once she could no longer act as his Prophet?
When King Sinbad had started his journey, and even before he had captured a single Dungeon, helping people came first. Their trust and loyalty were rewards, but he didn't go out of his way for people in order to gain those things. He really just wanted to do everything in his power to help. Watching Alibaba and Aladdin - and even Mori to an extent- had reminded him of his past self.
As his powers and responsibilities grew, Sinbad had started doing things the other way around. As a King, he couldn't afford to help everyone unless he could find a way for it to benefit him or his country. His end goal was still the same, but he couldn't deny that the way he treated people was changing. That was probably why Mori had called him a scoundrel. She had said it with a joking tone, but it was clear she didn't trust him fully. She read his Fate. How much would he change before achieving his dream?
Even knowing exactly the type of man he was, she had chosen to put her faith in him and become his vassal. But how much did she actually know? She said she knew how he would die. Was he just a dead man walking to her?
Mori was resting across the hall, but she might as well be on the other side of the world. There was no way she would let Sinbad talk to her like this. And he couldn't just enter that room with the other 2 sleeping in it.
Ruminating wasn't going to help him sleep and the waves of Fate were picking up for some reason. The floor boards in the hallway creaked. Sinbad wasn't so stripped down to be a problem, and he knew there was no need of his Djinn, but he did tie his hair back and slip on his shoes before leaving his room.
More light filled the hallway than there should have been. The bow side door was open. The waves were leading him that way as well.
The night air wasn't chilly by any measure -they were definitely getting close to Sindria. The sky was mostly clear too with a nearly full moon. One would be hard pressed to find better conditions for navigating at night. Past the sails, Sinbad could see clouds in front near the horizon. They would definitely reach their destination the next day.
Fate was always on Sinbad's side; Mori was leaning against the bowsprit. He'd recognize those legs anywhere. If she was up and about, she had to be feeling better. Just in time too.
Something was off about her posture. When she turned to face him he could tell something was wrong. She didn't respond to his call either.
Sinbad had an arm around her before she had a chance to fall. Her eyes were open but unfocused, her face was flushed, she was covered in sweat, and
her breathing was strained. The metal circles she normally wore weren't on her. He put his hand on her forehead -she was burning up. How had she gotten this far with a fever this high? Why didn't those two notice how bad she was?
Sinbad scooped her up and started walking towards the door. Mori seemed to melt into his arms. Her breathing got a little better. That was good at least.
Did she catch this in Balbadd? Again he told himself it was brought on by stress. If she was actually ill then he could loose her before they ever reached his country. No. She would be fine. He could feel it in the waves. She was supposed to live by his side.
Where to take her was a question for barely a second. If she really was sick then she needed to be kept away from others to keep whatever it was from spreading. Sinbad was the only one in his room, so his would be best for quarantine. Sure, they should have done this sooner if they knew she was unwell, but better late than never.
The sight of Mori exhausted in his bed was one he was looking forward to, but not like this.
After making sure she was comfortable Sinbad went to look for whatever medicines they had brought on the trip. He knew they at least had painkillers that would lower her fever.
Who was it that packed the medicine towards the bottom of the bag?
He heard the bed creek and the covers move. Was she awake or moving in her sleep?
*Sob*
Sinbad was by her side in a flash. Checking on her took priority.
The light was dim but he could see she was shaking. She looked very small curled up like that, and she was already small. Mori barely reached his shoulder when standing.
Had she been like this the whole time? This was much worse than what those two kids had said. At least he could comfort her now.
Sinbad sat on the side of the bed. His right hand gently caressed her hair. There was a hitch in her breathing at his touch.
Mori opened her eyes and looked around for the source of contact. Her night vision didn't seem that good. Once she noticed him she reached out one arm. Her hand latched onto his knee, and pulled herself up against his thigh.
Sinbad had lamented for most of the trip that he couldn't console her. Yet, now that he could, he couldn't shake the sudden wave of guilt. Mori was at her most vulnerable and she clearly wanted comfort. If he could be the one to bring her peace in this moment, it could be exactly what he needed to win her loyalty. Fate was giving him every opportunity he needed as it always did. It wasn't like him to feel guilty about this type of thing -not any more.
Would it be alright to do things like he did when he was younger? Mori had read Sinbad's life; she could read into his actions even if he didn't try to use this to make her trust him. But he couldn't just watch her suffer either. What if he helped without her knowing it was him? He could comfort her without gaining something from it. There was nothing to gain anyway because he already had as much as he could get for the time being, and pushing could backfire. He wouldn't have to consider it a lost opportunity, right?
Mori pressed her forehead into him. Her hand trembled. Another sob escaped her along with some garbled words he could barely make out. She was pleading to be forgiven for something. Mori was definitely struggling to cope with guilt.
Speaking would instantly erase any question in who he was so he kept quiet. Sinbad moved his hand to her back and started rubbing circles into it. She didn't get shocked this time.
After a bit, Mori grabbed his hand as it passed her shoulder with her free hand. He let her interlock their fingers. Her hand was warmer than normal -he had noticed when they first met that she had cold hands.
She definitely wanted comfort.
Would holding her help? The way her grip on his leg tighten felt like she was holding onto him for dear life. Sinbad decided to take that as consent. If she gave even the smallest sign of discomfort, he'd leave.
But before that he'd give her some painkiller to help with her fever. She was weak so removing her hands was physically easy, but emotionally taxing. Mori wined in disapproval, but didn't fight it -she couldn't fight it.
Luckily Sinbad was able to find the medicine quickly this time. After mixing it in a cup of water, he brought it over to the bed. Mori barely reacted when he lifted her into a sitting position. She drank the medicine without complaint, but did have a coughing fit afterwards -it was notoriously bitter. At least she had stopped crying.
When he laid her back down so he could put the cup away she grabbed at his clothes. Mori's eyes were open but she definitely couldn't see well since she was looking off to the side of him. It did sting a little that he could be anyone, and she would have the same response.
The waves were making him anxious. It felt like she could disappear.
Her grip didn't have any strength so her hand slid down the cloth. He caught it and held it while he reached with his other hand to put the cup down. He had to make sure she knew he wasn't going to leave her.
Sinbad sat on the side of the bed as he removed his shoes and hair tie. When he let go of Mori's hand, she just let it drop and didn't move. This wasn't good. Hopefully, she was just waiting to see what he was doing.
Mori made a small sound in surprise when he lifted the covers and pulled his legs underneath. As soon as he had settled down next to her, she reached out to him again, but no longer had the strength to pull herself to him. Sinbad pulled her into his arms for her and she melted there just like when he carried her earlier.
"Thank...you." Mori's voice was so weak he thought he had imagined it.
Sinbad held her tighter in response. Even if he could be anyone from her perspective, he wasn't just anyone. He was the only one holding her.
He could feel her strength draining by the second. Checking her with magoi manipulation didn't reveal anything good. If she hadn't wandered onto the deck, and if he hadn't followed the waves to her- He didn't want to think about it. He had finally found another person who could feel the waves of Fate and he might loose her to illness just like he had lost his
mother.
The Rukh would help Mori pull through. It had to. Fate always sided with Sinbad, so as long as he stayed near her she should recover just fine. He had felt in the waves that she was going to live the rest of her life in Sindria with him. There was no way he was going to let some illness take her from him.
Sinbad got up a few times to get her more water and medicine. If nothing else he had to keep her fluids up. Some of the best doctors and magicians were in his country. If she could hold on until they reached Sindria then they could help her.
By the time the sun peaked over the horizon Mori's breathing had stabilized and her fever broke. She had survived the night. She would be fine just like he knew she would. The relief washed over Sinbad with the waves, and he fell asleep with his Mori in his arms.
---
Sinbad woke up to the sounds of someone hissing his name. What did Ja'far want so early in the morning?
"Sin, what is this?! Why is Mori with you?? How could you do this??â The General was whisper yelling.
His words made Sinbad's eyes open. Mori was in his bed? That would explain the comfortable weight on his chest. No wonder he had slept so well. The previous night came back to him; it would have been better if she was with him for more enjoyable reasons. A quick glance assured him that her condition was still stable. "Quiet down. You'll wake her up."
Ja'far had his head in his hands. "Can I actually trust either of you? You both said you would behave yourselves and I find you like this?" He glared daggers at his King, "She only just became your vassal. What sort of-â
"I found her sick on deck in the middle of the night," Sinbad explained the situation to his friend, "So I can assure you that nothing happened."
"Why are sleeping in the same bed?" Ja'far was not backing down. Mori might still hold this against him, and, "What if you get sick too?" His voice cracked at the end.
Sinbad would never get sick because 'idiots can't catch colds.' The King might be a genus but he was also undoubtedly the biggest idiot Ja'far knew.
The Prophet gave a groan and buried her head into the chest acting as her pillow. She gave it a squeeze too for good measure; it was like she was telling Sinbad to go back to sleep. This was definitely a good morning for the King.
He looked up at Ja'far with a smile, "I'll be out in a few minutes. We can talk then."
The General left lamenting his choice of master.
Now that he was awake and alone with Mori, Sinbad had a decision to make. To wake her, find out how she's feeling, and explain that he took care of her, or not?
He looked down at her sleeping face while weighing his decision. Mori looked a little different without those metal circles. Now that the disturbing sound was gone she looked more content. The way she clung to him in her sleep was very endearing. He'd have to find more opportunities for her to do so when she was awake.
She didn't look to be in pain and she felt a little warm but not as feverish as before which were both good signs.
If he were to wake her up then what was the point of keeping quiet the previous night? She needed more rest anyway and he definitely didn't like the idea of being called a scoundrel again.
Sinbad did his best to wiggle out from under her. She gave a sleepy groan of disapproval and he had to agree with that sentiment. Mori's movements shifted her hair. He never noticed that she had pierced ears. It was probably because she wasn't wearing earrings.
Earrings were another good gift idea for welcoming his Beautiful Prophet to her new home. He was already planning to get her a new wardrobe, so a few accessories would be a normal addition.
The King put the rest of his clothes back on, then his metal vessels and other adornments, and left to find out the current state of things. At least he had gotten some sleep before having to take up his responsibilities.
---
~POV shift Mori~
Where the fuck had the comfy warm thing gone? And why had Ja'far and Sinbad bickered so loudly that I could hear it from my bed? -Not that I paid any attention to what they were saying.
Now that I was awake though, I realized that the "comfy warm thing" I was missing was probably the Sinbad I clung to in my dream. I always get cuddly when I'm unwell so giving myself a dream like that was par for the course.
I forced myself up and realized I didn't recognize my surroundings -and not just because everything was blurry without my glasses on. I definitely did not know this room. I could still hear the waves though and the room was swaying lightly, so I was obviously still on the ship.
The room only had the one bed. There was some kind of large wooden furniture nearby. A desk or dresser maybe?
I felt light headed.
Seriously, though... How did I get here? I had basically spent the entire trip in one room and it wasn't this one.
I remembered waking up in the middle of the night, I had felt the worst I had all trip, I went topside... Oh right. I fainted and Sinbad someone caught me. And then they took care of me even though they didn't have to... And they comforted me. That was probably why I had a dream like that.
I thought all of the passenger rooms were divided evenly though. Who was so privileged that they got a room all to their-
...
Next order of business: getting back to my room to get my glasses and other belongings.
I looked to the floor just to make sure I had left my flip-flops in my room. I was greeted with a blurry empty wood floor. Even without glasses I'd be able to make out if my shoes were there.
I made my way to the door with decent coordination.
The hallway was dim like normal. I had expected that, but I had forgotten how much worse my night vision is without my glasses. I really couldn't tell which end of the hallway was the door to the bow and which was the main deck.
This was fine. I could figure this out. The door placements weren't perfectly symmetrical so if I went to the middle of the hallway I should be able to figure it out without having to test the ends and risk looking like a bigger idiot than I already was. Technically, I could use the room I came out of for reference, but those thoughts brought my fever back. It would make my room the one to my left on the wall across from me though. I decided to call it "Fate" that I opened the correct door on the first try.
Since no one else was around I took the opportunity to wipe down and change clothes. There was no way I was going to continue wearing the clothes I had sweat in while I was so sick. Now that I was sure my fever had broke, I was back in my hoodie and shorts.
I just sat on my bed in a daze; I was so drained. I needed food or more sleep or both.
I heard shouting, but nothing I could make out. Then the distinctive sound of a stampede. I didn't move and waited for some clue as to what was going on -I didn't have the energy to move anyway. Had a south seas creature attacked? I hadn't heard splashing.
The door to the passenger rooms was opened. The runners went down the hall and the door to the room I was sitting in was yanked open.
Aladdin and Morgiana stopped in the doorway when they spotted me. I saw Alibaba run past behind them.
"Miss Mori! You're back!"
I nodded. "What's going on?â
"We're packing," Morgiana answered simply.
There's only one reason they'd be packing.
Aladdin excitedly added, "Mr. Ja'far said we'll reach Sindria soon. You can see it clearly!"
I packed my things too.
Those two asked me how I was feeling. They had been really worried about me. Now that I wasn't as sick, my
(Also, I'm still drafting the next arc so there's probably going to be one long break and then back to weekly posts. I mostly know what I want to happen for getting settled in Sindria but the order of events and the how are numerous. I've already written 3 different versions. The version of the ship to Sindira arc I went with is actually version 5 so you guys get an idea of how many dead timelines I write per arc before I get to the right one. I decided on the 5th version because I liked how it set up the upcoming arc.)
thoughts didn't have that cloud hanging over them. I could see how even though I wasn't close to anyone in this world yet, that there were still people who would care about me.
I definitely wasn't fully better, having been sick for so long. As soon as we'd get settled in, in Sindria I'd go back to sleep. I'd have to leave exploring to after I was better.
The kids finished packing before me and ran out with their bags. I grabbed some food before joining them. The one good thing about this not being a super long trip was that not all of the bread was hardtack.
(Hardtack is a bread that is rebaked multiple times until it is hard as a rock. This helps kill anything that could grow mold. Hardtack is normally for very long trips at sea where you can't just go get more food. It is not eaten on its own because it's so hard. It is put in soup or other liquids to soften when eating. Yes, I ate hardtack when reenacting. It tastes like the stalest bread you can imagine and saps flavor from everything it touches, but it is filling. Soup with hardtack is what I drew Mori and Alibaba eating in the previous chapter.)
#sindria's prophet#magi prophet fanfic#magi sinbad#magi fanfiction#sinbad magi#king sinbad#sinbad x oc#sinbadxoc#magi fanart#magi sinbad fluff
38 notes
·
View notes
Text
Marks of Love
Fandom: Kings of Paradise Pairing: Taki Kozaki x MC (Female) Warning: NSFWÂ Â
Sighing, MC glanced at the striking maroon love marks Taki etched deep into her skin. Earlier he passionately ravaged her hours prior before the sun rose this chilly November morning.Â
Today was Takiâs birthday, and their private celebration commenced the second the clock struck midnight. The wishes of happy birthday were barely professed by MC when Taki pinned her back down to the bed. Claiming her lips for his own, he savored the present of her very presence, and shared his appreciation by lavishing her chest in plentiful, rough kisses.Â
Rough may have been a bit of an understatement MC thought, as she further observed the vivid aftermath of their lovemaking sessions brightly peeking out from underneath the neckline of her robe. One of her hands reached up to touch the newfound blemishes, tracing the marks Taki left, feeling her body heat up at the memory of everything they did last night.Â
A faint blush creeped into MCâs cheeks as the recollection of their rendezvous flashed through her mind. She could still hear Takiâs guttural moans as he thrusted into her, and the way his muscles flexed when his hips roll-
âThere you are,â Taki murmured, interrupting his partnerâs daydreaming while he snuck up behind her and encircled MC into the comfort of his embrace. âI woke up and felt how cold your side of the bed was. Why would you abandon me? On the morning of my birthday nonetheless.â
âHappy birthday to you again,â MC giggled, pinching herself to regain her composure before turning around to face him. âAnd donât pout. I only left so I could start getting ready for the day and make you your favorites for breakfast. Iâm not planning on running off to anywhere else.â
Rising up on the tips of her toes, MCâs arms wrapped around his neck, gently tugging Taki down so she could gaze into his eyes. The softness of his expression made her heart thump rapidly, and MC found herself parting her lips, inviting the man she loved to take her breath away. Seconds felt like years as Taki slowly inched towards her face. Her thoughts racing in anticipation, MCâs eyelashes fluttered until Takiâs lips brushed hers. She mewled when he deepened their kiss, arching herself closer to him when Takiâs hand traced around her frame to cup the curve of her ass ignited a greed, she never acknowledged existed within her.Â
âYouâre pretty red already from just a kiss,â Taki teased, the smirk he wore smug indicating how aware he was of the true nature behind his companionâs blush. âYou couldnât possibly still be warm from last round now, could you?â
âIf I am, itâs your fault, Taki,â MC huffed, squealing when he suddenly swooped her up and sauntered back into the bedroom.Â
Taki paused at the foot of the bed, lowering MC down onto the floor until she was standing pressed up against the edge of the mattress. Locking his gaze onto her, Taki knelt down, vigilant in observing the blissful reactions from MCâs eyes clenching tightly shut whilst his fingers slipped underneath the hem of her robe. Her breaths became ragged when he intentionally stroked the area MC was most sensitive, deliberately circling his thumb in leisure circles through the fabric of the red panties she wore.Â
Surely the fact she was wearing them was no mere coincidence considering MC was more than aware of how witnessing the sheer material cling to her womanly curves drove him mad awakening a lustful desire within him. He wanted her. And judging by the dampness of her underwear Taki had been continuing to toy with, he realized the feeling was mutual. Blowing onto the nape of MCâs abdomen to tease and watch her squirm, Taki smirked before latching his teeth onto the band of fabric.  Â
âIâm unwrapping one of my gifts early,â Taki muttered, fervently dragging the silky garment down the surface of her thighs.Â
Once the underwear pooled onto the carpet, the real-estate tycoonâs hands reached under her robe to firmly cup her ass and tugged her closer. MC unfastened the tie of her robe to strip herself bare. Shimmying free from the clothing until the slight chill of the air grazed her skin, she threw one of her legs over Takiâs shoulder. Nuzzling his cheek against her thigh, Taki nipped at her flesh, imprinting the visible marks of his love upon her.Â
 âUnless you have any objections?â he breathed, pausing just out of reach from where she needed Taki to touch the most.Â
âY-You, know I donât,â she whimpered in a fit of impatience. Unable to control herself for any longer, MC grabbed onto the back of his head and joined them together.Â
âNgh!â MC cried, her body rippling in pleasure when the familiarity of his tongue intruded beyond the velvet of her glistened folds.Â
With a swift lift of her hips, Taki pushed MC back down onto the bed while his mouth pursued on his mission to ravage her. Each stroke was languid, sensuous, and eliciting melodious sounds from MC that both Taki and she werenât even aware she was capable of generating. Takiâs seasoned movements no sooner induced an explosion of heat, drawing her coils to intensely bind, leaving her body thrashing against the material of the sheets as she recovered from her pleasant high.Â
âYou taste better than any cake,â Taki uttered, lusting after the beautiful aftermath of her coming undone from the throes of his passion.Â
Ensuring that each delectable drop of her sweet nectar was ravished, Taki crawled up onto the bed and flipped her over until she was pressing into the mattress on all fours.
 âCan I be selfish and ask for another present?â
No verbal response was necessary, because MCâs body hummed in consent, thrusting back to invite him to use her in which he desired. His cock twitched, turned on by how sexy MC looked from this angle. The skin on her backside was creamy and untouched, similia as if she were a blank canvas waiting to be colored. Taki never was one to consider himself the artistic type, but he was driven by a desirous urge to mark the rest of her.Â
Crouching over MC, Takiâs teeth found the smoothness of her ass, roughly biting down until flushed crimson mark was imprinted onto her. Encouraged by MCâs groans of approval, Takiâs journey ascended her back, savagely nipping away to fully envelop her flesh in impressions of his love. Each nibble left MC hotter and hotter, yearning to experience a closer intimacy with Taki. On top of brimming in sensitivity from her previous release, the tantalizing foreplay was simply no longer enough to satisfy her.Â
âTaki,â she panted, squirming from the gratifying assault now occurring on her neck. âTaki, take me now. Make me scream your name, over and over again, until Iâm too exhausted too breath another word.â
For once, Taki was grateful that MCâs current position prevented him from being able to see her face. Her honest confession provoked a blush that stained his cheeks, and Taki was less than inclined to let her behold seeing him in such a flustered state. Wanting to distract MC and oblige her request, he surrounded to the temptation by latching his hands onto the curves of her waist. With a roll of his hips, Taki feverishly pressed into MC, both groaning at the tingling warmth euphoric sensation that immersed their bodies whenever they became one.Â
Concerned for MCâs well-being, Takiâs pace commenced gradually, heightening his speed only when the pleas from his lover to go harder reassured him. He stayed committed to fulfilling MCâs requests, because each vigorous thrust evoked cries of pure carnal rapture. Lovemaking with MC was always healing to him since their emotional connection stemmed beyond the bounds of solely physicality. Both his body and heart were full of captivation for her, and MC was the one constant in his life. He knew these feelings would never fade away; confident they would continue to flourish as time carried on.
The sound of their skin slapping together resounded throughout the room as Takiâs hips proceeded to crash into MC. Taki grunted when he her walls fluttered around him, clenching soundly around his expanding length. His cock growing harder, Taki slammed into MC, reaching out to give her hair a tug as they both were finally pushed over the edge. Blissfully drained from the zealous sex they had engaged in, MC collapsed down onto the mattress.
The rising sunlight streamed into the bedroom, trickling warmth down onto their damp bodies. Propping his head up with pillows, Taki enticed MC to rest her head on his chest. Inching over to cuddle close to Taki, MC wrapped her leg around his and nuzzled into his body. In MCâs new arrangement, Taki caught a glimpse of a few of the marks he left engraved on her body.
âMC,â Taki sheepishly âI went a little overboard with the hickeys. Iâm sorry, I lose all sense of control when Iâm with you. I love you so much, I can never get enough of you.â
âYou have nothing to apologize for, Taki,â she whispered, her voice hoarse from the noises she made earlier. âI love it when you mark me as your own.â
Sitting up in the bed, MC adjusted herself so she could brush Takiâs hair to the side of his face. Her hand pet the top of his head, and she placed tender kisses on his forehead to reassure him.
âAlthough there is something you can do to make it up for me,â she suggested, a sudden lightbulb going off in her head. Curious, Taki glanced up at her, willing to do anything that would please her.
âName it. Iâll do whatever it takes to make you happy.â
âWell, my terms are pretty straightforward,â MC cooed, climbing on top of Taki to straddle him. âYou have to promise that each year weâre going to spend your birthday together. It doesnât matter where we are, or what weâre doing, as long as we have each other.â
MC squealed when Taki leaned up and encircled her in a hug. His heart was racing at the prospect of spending the rest of forever as a couple. He gave her a squeeze before responding to the stipulation.Â
âI promise,â Taki vowed, extending his pinky finger out to swear on it. âNext year, the year after that, and all the ones succeeding after those.â
Linking their pinkies, they shook on their agreement. Wanting to celebrate the newfound deal, MC pushed Taki back down onto the bed. She ran her fingers down the muscles of his toned chest. The pining was mutual since she felt how turned on Taki was underneath her. Grinding her hips down on him, she watched in enjoyment as Taki withered beneath her.
âCare for breakfast in bed this morning?â she proposed, arching her eyebrow suggestively.Â
âYou should know by now I would never turn down an offer from you,â Taki responded.
The rest of the morning consisted of them staying locked away in the bedroom, with Taki enjoying his birthday treat by sampling on all MC had to offer.
#kings of paradise#taki kozaki#taki's birthday bash#kings of paradise fanfic#voltage inc#taki kozaki fanfic#love 365#sorry this is late#but this is the fic i decided to rewrite only to lose the ending#better late than never
107 notes
·
View notes
Text
Viktor on every Harbingers.
As stated before, Viktorâs loyalty tend to be more to the people of Snezhnaya and the Harbingers than the Tsaritsa, who he sees more as a faceless tradition despite, yes, believing in the cryo archonâs mission. However, when it comes to his daily life, it is actually the Harbingers who possess his devotion.
Viktor is implied to have, at the very least, witnessed the harbingers which I imagine are during Fatui events, speeches and such, and is knowledgeable of both their way of work, their abilities, the personality they present, quirks and what the other Fatui think of them in general. This is a post based on the information we got so far in canon, the Commedia dellâarte and of course liberal interpretations to flesh out Viktorâs relation towards the harbingers, it is HEAVILY subject to change.
This list goes from who Viktor would like to work for the LEAST to the MOST. Viktor admires all Harbingers and see how incredible they are to the Fatui cause, but this is purely him speaking selfishly in terms of working under them.
SCARAMOUCHE Scaramouche is implied by Viktor to be pretty much universally disliked by the Fatui, which is supported by his shown temper. Scaramouche is one to belittle and not respect underlings, even potentially harming them physically through electro, and lead them with fear. Scaramouche throws emotional, gratuitous tantrums.
This is something Viktor cannot respect when strictly speaking of ways to run the chain of commands. This is no way to be a leader, not when you do not have reasons to apply this kind of authority. Scaramoucheâs devastating power, however, is no joke, and given that the Tsaritsa has had her own reason to choose him, there is no question that Viktor would answer the manâs call and orders, but would he enjoy his daily working life under such a self-centered man with no respect for the lives he is responsible for but his own ? Not really. Heâd sooner ask for a transfer... which is, unfortunately, not really possible within the Fatui, as you are to believe that where you are stationed is where you should be.
PIERRO Pierroâs crazed antics constantly have one question his state of mind, and his chaotic mockery and obvious bitterness are made for a sour association, where one can never really rest as the man is too unpredictable. Underlings unable to guess what his plans are, given he never tell anyone anything.
Pierro doesnât care what happens when his subordinates are sent on assignments, not caring if they are casualties or not. As someone who values his life, even if he is loyal and swore an oath to the chain of command, Viktor much rather stay alive. The man is... devastating.
SANDRONE Sandrone uses underhanded tricks and manipulates people to get what he wants, hiding behind a face of kindness to the people. Although Viktor is one to recognize the grey areas of politics, which is, politics is everywhere in any social interactions, Sandrone stands out because he is not influencing peopleâs judgements, he is a hypocrite who takes advantage of commoners when they meet their lowest points.
This, alongside his eerie puppets... is absolutely terrifying. Viktor cannot help but, unlike Scaramouche where he sees the immaturity and lack of professionalism of one man, feel genuine fear... and fascination. The things he could learn from this man, he cannot even start to comprehend.
PULCINELLA Pulcinella is the harbinger in charge of the Fatuiâs military and, alternatively, its recruits camp. Viktor would be more than happy to give his body for the nation if needed, even if the battlefield is not his ideal position.
Technically, all Fatui receives a form of military training. The difference with Pulcinella is mainly that the Skirmishers are constantly enhanced through the Fatui technology, modified as their body belongs to the nation. Viktor personally has no interest in being cut open and changed, as he spent a significant amount of time perfecting his form and knowing his own body. Not everyone has the mental fortitude to be more than happy to be pumped with drugged and have their brain reconstructed to be a better martial weapon.
PANTALONE As the one gathering all funds related to Snezhnaya and the Fatui, working for Pantalone is about contributing to the wealth of the nation, an absolute vital part which, however, comes with a ruthless environment. Whereas politics and influence are more subjective, wealth is about cold, hard numbers in an unsure, competitive scene.
Although Viktor is the first one to tell that there is no bad way to gather money and actually admire the length the man goes for the nationâs mission, what is more of a desk job with very little flexibility (the way political debates and diplomatic exchanges do) is bound to bore him out, thinking like his wits could be used elsewhere.
TARTAGLIA When there is need for intimidation, Tartaglia Childe is the one sent by her Lady Tsaritsa. When there is need for muscles on the field, Tartaglia Childe is also the one sent. Although Viktorâs hunting background would technically make his skills appropriate for the task, Viktor is still not one who actually enjoys applying, letâs say, physical matters, especially unconventional ones Tartaglia Childe is sent into : it is not a straightforward army VS army combat. It is something which require finesse... a dangerous game which doesnât necessarily fit Viktor.
As for the young lord himself, although he is one of the most respectable harbinger, Tartagliaâs impulsiveness and free spirit is known to suddenly put operations into chaos, without him going through the proper channels. This, honestly sounds both thrilling, rewarding and amazing... which is not Viktorâs cup of tea. However, Tartaglia has been proven to be the harbinger who respects underlings the most as individuals, despite his casual attitude giving some rookies the false impression that he is a softie... it just makes getting a disciplinary action from him harder.
SIGNORA La Signora is her majestyâs most direct representative in the manners of political and courtly presence. Although working for Signora is a door to open many opportunities to political events for oneâs ascension in their career, Signora knows the game... and plays it dirty. Many threats are given under technically diplomatic moves, and as someone who hates losing time on something else than her goals, she has no olive branch to any subordinate, who are pawns for her to be at her service like a mighty mistress... but her ways are always so bloody efficient, the results speak for her manners. Always ahead of the whole court. A queen in any place she walks in.
Technically, Viktor cannot complain about his position, although he is very disgruntled about being that low in the food chain... and extremely neglected. Sigh. Even if he is one to not bother about a pause to his advancements, Viktor cannot get, at least, the satisfaction of doing something for his home... because heâs not doing anything and heâs denying the fact that heâs been forgotten.
DOTTORE Dottore is the most cerebral and knowledgeable of the harbingers, with actual results and hard work to show. As someone in need of mental stimulation, Viktor cannot help but be mesmerized at the constant studying opportunity, under a man who knows exactly what he is doing, what he wants, and makes it clear.
The practical application of skills and sense of professionalism make Dottore both a harbinger Viktor personally admire greatly and would like to work under : with such talent which shouldnât, for Viktor, be wasted for a single second, he is no scientist, but would gladly do anything to remotely be useful to him. Dottore is actually one of the three harginers where Viktorâs respect, for various reasons, actually cancel part of the fear he would normally get from a man doing such harsh experiments.
CAPITANO The first time Viktor laid his eyes on Capitano, heâd never forget. For whatever reason the man was in his region, probably some undisclosed assignments, he had never seen a man breathing so much charisma by merely existing. Amidst the men whoâd try to appear strong and tall, Capitano didnât have to be the tallest or largest to be absolutely mesmerizing. A man who commanded authority by presence alone.
He needed to be like him. And this is when a young Viktor decided to join the Fatui, not telling a single word that a single man triggered it all. Viktor doesnât see himself as someone with particular talent, drive or patience to change the world... but if he could be half the man his idol was, that would be enough... but did he want to be the man, or solely be by his side, even if it meant potentially never working under him ? ... both.
As a recruit, Viktor would always run to the pavilion up the Fatui base to see Capitano entering the premises whenever his arrival was announced, watching from afar, get information on what the man had been up to. The stories of the manâs conquests, exploring uncharted territories while keeping such a solemn expression, an inspiring leader whoâd run his affairs with the most unforgiving grip, to the perfection, with every bit of professionalism and no break in his composure.
If Viktor was to work under this man, he wouldnât care a single bit about the treatment on his person. If he can be the slightest bit not indirectly, but directly useful to such a man, he would gladly serve him with every bit of devotion he has. Travelling at his side with the most powerful assets to the Fatui, each challenge only one exciting puzzle after one another.
If Viktor sees the holy Tsaritsa as the Fatuiâs queen, Capitano is his King.
#.otverzhennyy ( headcanon )#insert simp jokes here#this took me waaaay too long and it is SO confusing but I needed t oat least have something done for this
16 notes
·
View notes
Text
The Land That Our Grandchildren Knew (B!Reader x Brian May)
![Tumblr media](https://64.media.tumblr.com/5dcf7076e5ae9ca903aabf4568af849a/d5d274a319c80204-aa/s540x810/c32fa6e26c63ce57cb13689909aa42d7b79c04ae.jpg)
THIS WORK IS PART OF THE ORIGINAL TIMELINE
Requested: NO
Type: SFW, FLUFF ?, ANGST.
Summary: A little glance at life back to normal after Brian and B!Reader get over the cheating scandal.
Warnings: None.
A/N: So this came out of nowhere in my mind. I have struggled with being creative for a while and I just do not know why(?) but here we are! I hope someone out there enjoys reading this one.
*For anyone who does not remember (lol it has been a while): B!Reader (often B!R) is "Brian!Reader", and R!Reader (or R!R) is "Roger!Reader".
âThe one thing he did not know was how much I loved him. In a previous life, in a time when things were so much more complicated. When war was splitting us apart and leaving us breathless. Motionless in a world of aggressive turmoil. There was little we could do when everything was amiss. All around us things were blowing up, giving in upon themselves the buildings fell, and the cities died along with their lights and spectacles.
âThe love I grew and nurtured for him was the last reminding power of the old Earth, scattered through the cosmos like dust as I searched for him in a ridiculous journey. I did not meet a king in a tiny planet, and I never saw a rose grow on the dry lands of the foreign space countries. We had each other but time made it so that I was here today while he was here yesterday. Today was never ours, today was a promise we believed and ate up and followed with blind eyes until the moment when the sound of truth, deafening and cruel, locked us out of each otherâs life. And still, forever, my love for him is true and enduring. Out there, I know he will feel my presence in the air, see me in the clouds, savour me in the smell of rain and grass. He will miss me when the night is cold, and the sound of wind reminds him of my voice⊠Yes, he will be empty when he hears the silence, the way I will always feel too when I look back at Earth and regret every second spent away from the one who called me Venus.â
The crowd claps and smiles and I see the people in the front look at the books in their hands with expressions of confusion and deep thought. A good reason to write something is to make people wonder, so for B!Reader this one was a success. She had taken so long to finish the manuscript, not that she was being lazy; with the scandal of Brian cheating and the twins taking sides, it was hard to focus on this. This book was not what she intended on writing when she began doing research for it. It started with the Irish War of Independence, she went around Britain meeting historians with much better understanding and knowledge on the topic. It soon turned upside down when the news appeared on every single form of media⊠Brianâs stunt. She would call it what it was now; he had cheated.
It was hard to get over it. B!Reader took time off with her mother in Scotland, she had taken the kids with her, much to Brianâs displeasure, but he was in no position to complain. When she came back home, she was still defeated by the details. Brianâs lame explanation sounded more like an excuse but even she had to admit that her husband did not have the best track record when it came to women. She was probably the one he had been the most loyal to at that point â even when he had cheated on her once.
So, she tried. They sought professional help. A therapist. First coupleâs therapy, and then one-on-one sessions alone. She hated every second of it, which could not have been fun to hear for their therapist. Nothing seemed to be helping, in fact B!Reader talked to a lawyer in secret⊠but her career was also on the line at that point, and she was desperate for ideas, desperate to reconnect with the only man she ever truly and completely loved. Her manager had the idea, âread some of Brianâs stuff, maybe ask him about his PhD work, maybe he will inspire you and if he doesnât at least you will have spoken to each other⊠itâs worth a tryâ. And so B!R did that, although not in the way her manager had meant. She was stirring her on the direction of reading some of his lyrics not his space dust thesis⊠Nevertheless, the story began there.
B!R could not understand much, and she wound up spending a lot of time talking about physics and space with her husband. Brian was a patient teacher, she already knew that, but it was now being confirmed to her. He was also happy to be able to go on and on for hours, the topics where his cup of tea, and they had numerous cups of tea too while B!R took notes and began toying with a historical fantasy mix for her next book.
Today she was reading from her favourite chapter in the book. It had been a massive hit; one she could not quite understand. If she was being honest, the book was more like therapy for her than her actual therapy sessions had been. She cried while writing it and poured a lot of emotion into it, which she rarely did. Her writing had always been more âŠimpersonal, presented almost as a sort of biography of fictional characters rather than real moving parts of the imaginary world they were living in.
She had never written such an odd story before, with time skips and a weird space journey concepts implanted in the middle of 1920 Ireland.
âYou did great, mum.â A proud Fred wrapped his arm around her middle.
Even though the teen boy was still that, a teenager, he managed to already stand a couple centimetres taller than his own mother.
âThank you love, did you get anything of that?â She wondered, wrapping her arm around him in the familiar way a mother does.
Arm around his shoulder, soft play of the tender fingers on the dark curls on the back of the head of her âlittle boyâ.
âNothing at all,â he smiled and shrugged, honesty dripping in shameless glee from his tone. âBut thatâs the cool part, I donât think anyone gets it.â The younger of the twins looked at his mother up and down in her bright blue dress. âExcept Dad. Was that the point?â
B!Reader looked at her son and inhaled a deep long breath, which she held for a moment. Her brows furrowed and her mouth moved like that of a fish.
âMaybe.â She conceded.
âHey mum, would you sign my book?â Harry interrupted, bringing along Jazz and a peculiarly uninterested Max.
Harry gave his mother a wide smile and put a copy of her own book in her hands.
âFor Harry, please.â
âDork,â Max rolled his eyes.
He was the only one to admit he had not finished the book yet the previous weekend when Fred mentioned his mother was doing a reading at a local bookstore while they sat by the Taylorâs pool. And he rushed to get through it. Max was not dumb, and he managed to grasp some of the concepts in the complicated plot, although he did not let on to any of his friends.
âLoved the wormhole bits Mrs May.â Max said once Harry had his signed copy reading for Harry with Love. âThat dark hole and the speed of dark and light near the end were mind-blowing. I never thought of you as a fantasy writer!â
B!Reader nodded and blushed at the compliments. Max was a lot like Roger in that he did know how to make a girl blush with what appeared to be little effort.
âI am glad you liked it,â she said, a trace of pride in her voice.
âI really wish Darragh and Conor had ended up together,â Jazz voiced from around Harryâs tall lean and awkward teen figure. âThey were obviously meant for each other.â
Fred had been in tears when he read the ending of the book. Of course, he would have hoped for his motherâs first queer paring to end together but what that did was echoing life.
âYou have to be the eighth person whoâs said that to me today.â
R!Reader, Roger and Brian were in a conversation of their own next to the long table B!Reader was about to sit before to meet some fans and sign as many copies of her book as time allowed.
She eyed the silver hair on her husbandâs hair, she had been discreet when describing Darragh in her book. A tall, talented, middle-aged, idealist Irish man. A man born in a difficult time. A man who fell in love by mistake, with Conor. A young man described often as immature, who enjoyed a quiet life on board of a spaceship when he got caught up in a black hole and wound up going back hundreds of years and miles into the past. Conor had almost been killed in his attempts of helping his beloved Darragh in fighting what he considered to be hiswar. The battles gave their relationship meaning, although it was never spoken about between them. The adoration was always palpable and present to the last page. Down to the moment when Conor acknowledges that his lover cannot come with him once he finds the way back into his ship, and then it turns into a matter of will. Darragh is revealed to have a similar story, only that⊠he was left stranded in 1905 with no way back to his ship. âThe voice of Venusâ was really a metaphor for B!Reader. A complicated one, as her feelings were when she had to love the man who broke her heart. She felt lost the way Conor felt, but she could tell Brian had been lost for a while before the entire ordeal â defeated in the same manner as Darragh. And it was fitting, he was older, he was educated. He should have known better than to play in the physics lab with those dangerous materials. Brian should have known better than to play with that old woman. Conor could have turned his back on Darragh, he knew he was of no help now that he was so invested in the past â now their present. He knew Darragh and himself would never be able to be together if he stayed and they would most likely get killed if they marched on. So B!Reader made them split. She was about to leave Brian when she started writing her book, so it made sense. And when she realised, she did not want to end her marriage, she still wrote it that way because this was the ending she had seen coming for herself before â one she fortunately managed to evade, which still was the ending for many couples.
B!Reader watched the teens as they began discussing the book, Max and Jazz were defending the plot, Fred joined in and the three of them seemed to be getting passionate about proving Harry wrong. The eldest of the group was stubborn about his stance on Conor being right to leave Darragh.
His mother could not help but remember that same stubbornness from the first few weeks after the story broke. Harry had been the one to take it the hardest. When they packed for Scotland, she had to stop him from shattering his project guitar, the yellow guitar he and Brian had been working on for a while. âI donât want it! I do not want anything from him! He is a liar!â He had yelled, with the side of his face still reddened from a slap he received from Brian. She still could not believe she managed to stay impartial at that moment after the mess that had happened in the kitchen when Harry insulted his father â earning a slap from him.
âItâs alright,â B!Reader placed her arm around the twinsâ shoulders. âConor had to go back anyway. He had a family in the spaceship.â
âWhat?â Jazz was the first one to open her mouth.
With a laugh, the young writer looked at the confused faces around her. âHe could never stayâŠâ She shrugged.
Harryâs expression flashed with a difficult emotion, which both Jazz and his mother noticed.
The short girl flipped her long blonde hair and checked the time on her phone, âno wonder Iâm hungry! Whoâs coming?â Her blue eyes searched around in an almost innocent manner.
âYou got to be joking, we JUST ate.â
Max stepped back from his sister and Fred followed, âsorry, I told dad Iâd get lunch with him.â
Blue eyes flipped onto Harryâs figure. B!Reader gave him a squeeze and let go, the sigh he let out being enough of an answer for Jazz to show a large smile, reaching out to grab his hand and pull her to her side. It almost seemed a pass of the baton.
The boy walked taller than Jazz and still, it looked like he was the smaller child. She was sure they had been doing a good job as parents, although that slipdid a number on Harry. The curly haired boy pulled the glass door open and let Jazz go first, only to have her childishly cling on to his arm once they were outside, a smile breaking his serious expression when his young friend told him something â they were too far for B!Reader to make out what Jazz said.
âWhere are those two going?â Brian walked up to her.
He had a cardboard cup of coffee in his hand, which he offered to her. With a mumble she took it and had a testing sip â it was too bitter, but it would do. âNandoâs. Probably.â She gave her husband a soft smile.
Brian nodded in silence, a reflective look on his face.
âHe needs some time, Bri.â She guessed what he was thinking about.
âItâs been a year,â he said with caution.
âHe is getting over it, love.â She took a step closer to Brian and whispered, âheâs picked up the guitar again.â They shared a look before someone called for B!Reader and she left her husband with a peck on the cheek.
#original timeline#about the original timeline#b!reader x brian may#b!reader#brian may#present day!brian may
21 notes
·
View notes
Text
Gone and Back Again
Hello and welcome to chapter 5 of the manic creation that is my princess bride au. Iâm slowly seeing my creative energy wind down, so the chapters for week three and four might be slightly more brief than this weeks and next weekâs chapters are. It looks like there will be five for next week as well, but not all of them will fit the Albion Party prompts. ¯\_(ă)_/ÂŻ
~5100 words. (AO3 Link)Â
Arthur and Morgana are our main dynamic today. (platonic)Â
Warnings: suicidal ideation, depiction of depression, mentions of force feeding, memory loss, and non-consensual memory alterations. (All of this happens after the cut)Â Further: Lots and lots of talk of marriage. And I don't know how marriage works in the long ago times, so if it doesn't make much sense, please excuse me. Merlin is a little sus this chapter, but it gets explained in chapter 7. Oh, in this AU Arthur and Morgana are not related in any way. Just in case you were worried about that.
---
Becoming the Kingâs Ward is even more suffocating that being the daughter of a Lord. She is always expected to be dressed in finery, she is almost never alone, and far too many men look at her. Arthur does his best to keep them away, but it becomes clear in late Autumn that Uther doesnât intend for her to be Arthurâs wife. He invites a neighboring king and his very lovely daughter to the Samhain festival.Â
Morgana is still seated in a place of honor, but her usual place beside Arthur is occupied by the Princess Vivian. The girl is so insufferable that it hurts to even think her name, and so Morgana does not spend much time speaking to her.Â
Morganaâs lack of socializing is excused time and again by someone or other who says that sheâd just lost bother her parents, last week, less than a month ago, only a month ago, only a few months ago⊠She doesnât have to pretend to be happy, at least, but she knows the excuse will not last.Â
Days pass and at Yule, a different princess is at the castle. This one stays for weeks because of the bad weather, and Morgana becomes a ghost in the palace.Â
Uther calls her to his chambers one night, a nobleman she doesnât recognize is also there, likely for the sake over own reputation.Â
âMorgana, please sit.â Uther gestures to the place across from his desk, and she takes the seat gracefully, keeping her face cool and collected. âThe Princess Elena has expressed concern for your wellbeing. She says you seem, despondent. I understand your parents death was very distressing, and no one expects your mourning to be finished, but I will ask this of you only once. You are to make sure the Princess Elena feels welcome here. She is very likely to become Arthurâs betrothed, and if you are to continue to stay here, you should become friendly with her. Do I make myself clear?âÂ
He thinks I want his son. She nods and smiles sheepishly. An act she had learned pleased him early on. âI understand, Your Majesty. I will make every effort to show her kindness and make her feel welcome, just as you welcomed me.âÂ
âGood girl.â He turned back to his papers and she stood, dismissed.Â
Arthur is waiting outside the door for her.
âWhat did he say to you?â He fell into step beside he and she smiled wanly.
âHe intends to marry you to Elena, and I should not be so cold to her if I would like to stay here.âÂ
âI would never let him turn you out. You know that.â
She and Arthur had built a tentative sort of alliance since sheâd come to live in the palace. In keeping with that alliance, he took her hand in the guise of reassuring her, while slipping two gold coins into it. She placed them in the pocket of her dress. Beside the ring she had stopped wearing upon the kingâs demand.Â
âI donât think youâll have much of a choice.â
âIâd go with you.â He promises, and she laughs.Â
âNo you wouldnât. Your loyalty is too bound to Camelot and itâs people.â
âYou are a person of Camelot, arenât you?âÂ
âThatâs not what I meant and you know it.âÂ
They walk in silence until they reach Morganaâs chambers. At her door they stop and finish the conversation. âPrincess Elena has no interest in marrying me. She wants to rule alone.âÂ
Morgana smiled, âGood for her.â
âYes. You should still be nicer to her.âÂ
âI am nice!â She said with a scoff. When Arthur raised an eyebrow at her she conceded, rolling her eyes. âIâm not any less nice to her than I am to you.â
âYes, but I know youâre nice inside. Elena just thinks you hate her.âÂ
âI will smile at her at dinner tonight, will that make you happy?âÂ
âImmensely.â Arthur bows and kisses her hand before he goes, and Morgana make a very unladylike face of disgust at him. He does this to exasperate her and amuse himself, and she plays into it every time.Â
â
The castle servants are not as kind as the ones from her home, or as loyal. Not to her, at least. Her stash of coins is discovered and taken, and the King is cold to her for many days. Each stash of coins she manages to acquire receives a fate much the same, until Arthur starts hiding the coins for her. His servant doesnât take coins, but he does manage to âput awayâ every bit of traveling supplies Arthur manages to help her acquire.Â
Eventually, she gives up. Spring comes and goes, then another Winter. She mourns the loss of her freedom almost as much as she mourned Lancelot. Eventually the hopelessness gets the better of her, and she takes ill. Arthur visits her everyday, and at first she can muster the occasional conversation, but as time passes she finds she has the will to speak to him less and less, and eventually, she goes quiet. He is good, and kind. The last thing she intends to do is bless him and wish him well when she thinks that she will die.Â
She doesnât die.Â
Uther calls physicians from every corner of the Kingdom to come and tend her, and promises the position of court physician to anyone who manages to cure her. Sheâs poked and prodded, and Arthur is by her side as often as he can be. She doesnât trust these strange men and so sheâs always grateful for his presence, even if she doesnât say so. She wishes they would just leave her to die, but her body is too heavy to move, and her mind too clouded to protest.Â
Her dry lips barely part to take a little water. She canât eat, and her sleep is fitful.Â
She goes through nearly a dozen physicians before one, Merlin Emerys, finally cures her.Â
âTake this.â Is all he says to her, not even bothering to do a physical exam.
She is laying on her side, curled in on herself, much the same position sheâs been in all afternoon. She doesnât reach fo the medicine when he offers it, and only his assistant, Gwen, can coax her into motion.
âHe looks very young, doesnât he?â Gwen asks as she smooths hair back from Morganaâs face. âHe is, but he is very knowledgeable. Studied with all the best physicians in the five kingdoms. Here, letâs sit you up.â Gwen takes her under the shoulders and props her up. Arthur moves forward and adjust her pillows so she can lean against them, taking Morganaâs hand to help her shuffle back against them in the bed.
Her whole body hurts, aches with the motion. She feels hopeless, like nothing will ever be right again, and the only reason she doesnât protest is because there is no point. Sheâll just be force fed whatever concoction he has for her if she does. That was what happened with the first physician who had come to see her.Â
She canât focus on anything thatâs happening, she just takes what sheâs given, letting Gwen give her medicine. She drinks and the bitterness she is expecting never comes. Whatever this tincture is, itâs sweet, and there is just enough of it for a few sips. She swallows it down and then Gwen lets her go, lets her rest against the pillows and returns to Merlinâs side.Â
Arthur and Merlin bend their heads together and whisper to each other. Arthurâs shoulders are tense, hunching inward, while Merlin speaks low and easy. Gwen stays beside him all the while, but says nothing. There is no ring on her finger, so she is not his wife. Morgana wonders idly if they are involved.
Itâs the most interest sheâs had in anything in months.Â
Arthur sees Merlin out of the room, and a servant comes in to bring Morgana something to eat. She finds that she is starving, and she eats everything given to her. It was a small amount of a wide array of food, the castle staff having been told to prepare anything and everything they thought might make her eat. She eats all of it, and Arthur watches her with wide eyes.Â
âWhat?â She asked when she finally stopped eating long enough to see her friend. The servant who had brought her dinner was out of earshot, straightening the room, but Arthur looked at her and held his tongue. Morgana watched his eyes, and then nodded, understanding. He sat beside her bed and took her hand in his.Â
When the maid moved further away to get Morganaâs bath water, Arthur leaned close to her and whispered, âThe potion is already working. Iâm afraid it is not just medicine he peddles.âÂ
Morgana raised her eyebrows at the accusation, but Arthur shook his head, looking to the maid again. âIâm glad youâre eating well. I hated watching you be force fed.â
âYou could have stopped it.â She reminded him, in fact, she had begged him to stop it, weak and breathy from too little time spent speaking in too many days.Â
âYou would have died. I hated it, but I would not see you dead.âÂ
âThe kingdom will talk. The Crown Prince favoring an orphaned girl.â
âAnd orphaned Lady. Itâs hardly out of character.âÂ
âIt is out of line with your fatherâs plans for you. Which princess does he like for you think season?â
Arthur laughed. âPrincess Mithian.âÂ
Morgana had never met princess Mithian. She found she wanted to, if only to compare her to all the other princesses that she had seen paraded in front of Arthur.
It was one of the first things sheâd wanted to do in a long while.
âGet out.â She said, her voice stronger than it had been in weeks. âI need to dress.âÂ
âItâs late afternoon.âÂ
âAnd dinner is soon. I need to dress. Get out.âÂ
Arthur laughed, and squeezed her hand as he stood, gesturing the maid over to help Morgana out of bed for the first time of her own accord in days.Â
â
The Lady Morgana goes down to eat dinner with the Prince and the King for the first time in a month that evening. Uther immediately calls for a servant to bring him Merlin, who he assigns the position of court physician. For the first time in weeks, Morgana smiles brightly, and whatever the man has done, Uther is glad for it.Â
Morgana eats heartily, almost unbecomingly heartily, but neither Uther nor Arthur begrudge her the meal. She is boney, and her dress is loose from the weight sheâd lost in her sickness. She is to eat to her heartâs content.Â
The food Morgana eats tastes divine. For weeks everything in her mouth felt like ash and nothingness. Now the warm sting of wine and hot vegetables feels like home, like life, and she is eager to take it all in.Â
Uther asks her questions, and she is eager to speak, happily chatting about her intentions to take a morning ride, her desire to return to her studies, and even her desire to start looking for a husband.Â
This catches Arthur by surprise.Â
Morgana has not spoken of a husband of her own accord except to speak of her dead love, Lancelot. Something about this is strange.Â
When dinner is over, Arthur excuses himself and goes to find the Court Physician, Merlin.Â
âWhat did you do to her?â Arthur finds Merlin in the court physicians chambers with his assistant, Gwen. Merlin is wide eyed and watchful when Arthur enters his room.
âI gave her a medicine to heal her mind. She is better now, yes? Eating, active, back to her usual self?âÂ
âYes.â Arthur doesnât dare make an accusation without more proof, but the wary way that Merlinâs assistant watches him makes Arthur think that he is on the right track. âI havenât seen her this happy since before her parentâs deaths.âÂ
âGrief can sometimes be so deep that it dulls everything else. Whatâs the point of food when youâre in so much pain you canât fathom going on?âÂ
Merlin sounds so wise, so knowledgeable, when he speaks, but Arthur is suspicious.Â
âIf you say so. Well, whatever youâve done. Thank you.âÂ
âI live to serve.â The physician waits for Arthur to leave, but he doesnât go without sizing Merlin up first.
He would be able to take him in a fight, if needs must.Â
â
Time goes by and Morgana is happier than Arthur has ever seen her and while he is glad for it, his suspicions never waver.Â
They are never left alone anymore, upon his fatherâs insistence. With Morganaâs willingness to speak of marriage, he thinks maybe heâs trying to discourage anything untoward between them. This makes it hard to ask Morgana the question he so desperately needs an answer to. He sees hints of it, but he doesnât find hard proof of anything. She doesnât stare off in the distance like she once did. She smiles like she has no worries. She never slips her hand into her pocket to touch Lancelotâs ring.Â
Merlin is a good court physician. He can heal almost any ailment, or at the very least help the patient be comfortable. Gwen is also very competent, though she is quiet. She doesnât talk much to the other servants, as heâs heard from George. Or, as heâs made George tell him in his own quest to wheedle out whatever information he can about Merlin.Â
Merlin is a hard nut to crack. The manâs face never falls, always tranquil, always sure of himself. Even in the most dire circumstances, he is easy-eyed and softly smiling, like he expects everything will just go his way eventually.Â
Uther eats it right up.Â
Arthur doesnât dare make his suspicions known until he has proof, and even then he thinks heâll have a hard time having a man killed whoâs done so much good, but a year on and he still doesnât know whatâs wrong with Morgana. Between his new and increasing duties as a knight and the crown prince, and Morganaâs now constant activity, he barely has time to speak to her, let alone discern what the problem might be.Â
He has nearly a whole sack of gold coins discreetly saved before he mentions to Morgana that if she wishes to leave, soon she might be able to.
When Morgana smiles serenely at him and says she has no wish to leave, Arthur knows that something is wrong. And he canât do anything about it.Â
â-
Morganaâs parents have been dead for two years, a plenty adequate mourning time, when Uther starts suggesting matches. First a Lordâs son that Arthur knew to be a cad. Next a young Lord who was fine but very bland. After that, a prince from a neighboring Kingdom who had caught word of Morganaâs beauty and shown interest.
All of these men Morgana entertained, smiled at, was polite to, far more polite than she had ever been to Arthur before her mind sickness. She made them smile and completely enthralled them, only to turn down each proposal made, all smiles and apologies.Â
That, at least, gave Arthur some comfort.Â
But after a year of failed courtings, three years in the palace, people were starting to talk. Morgana is 21 and people start to call her unlovable. They donât say such things about Arthur, and he is nearly 23. It seems unfair to him, that people are so cruel.Â
âIf this keeps up, you might have to marry her, Arthur,â Uther said in passing once, rubbing his temple while he read an angry letter sent by yet another lord turned down by the Lady Morgana. âGorlois used to speak of her unwillingness, but I never expected sheâd be so brazen about it here.âÂ
Arthur doesnât think before he speaks, going over the grain reports from the latest council meeting in more detail. âIs that an option?âÂ
The soft sound of Uther setting down the letter heâd been reading draws Arthurâs attention up from his own.Â
âIs that something you would consider?â Uther had made no secret of his distaste for Arthurâs own reluctance to marry. Uther, of course, hadnât been married until he was almost 26, but he often forgot that.Â
âMaybe. If she was amenable.â Arthur shrugs. It would save them both a lot of trouble, at least. They were good friends, Arthur would never press for a physical relationship, and their marriage would be in name only. For Morganaâs sake, it would probably be the least painful option. Arthur wouldnât mind not having his father trying to force him to fall in love with new women every season either.Â
Of course, there was still the question of status.Â
Uther doesnât respond, but Arthur can feel the kingâs eyes on him long after heâs gone back to reading over the grain report.Â
â
A month later, while they are having dinner, Uther asks Morgana if she has any interest in courting Arthur. Considering this is right in front of Arthur, heâs quiet embarrassed, but Morgana only smiles, laughs, and says, âArthur is one of my dearest friends.âÂ
âDear friends make the best husbands.â He raises his brow at her, watching her every reaction. She looks over the table at Arthur, who smiles, shrugs. They donât get much time to talk now, but maybe if they were courting, he would finally have time to get to the bottom of Morganaâs drastic change in demeanor.Â
âWell, I suppose thereâs no harm in courting. It can always be broken if we donât agree with each other?â She looks at Arthur when she asks this question, and Arthur nods, solemn.Â
Uther grins and claps his hands together. âExcellent.â He just seems happy to have two problems off his hands all at once.Â
And Morganaâs unwillingness to marry had been a problem. Rumors started to fly that sheâd been holding out for the prince since their first meeting, wrapping him around her finger for three long years until he had no choice but to beg Uther to court her. Morgana never mentions these rumors, and so neither does Arthur.Â
Morganaâs early morning ride is now accompanied occasionally by Arthur, and George. They sometimes take their breakfast alone, save for a chaperone, usually the Lord Agravaine, who had also been seeing over Morganaâs lands.Â
Itâs on one of their shared rides that Arthur manages to tell her that he wonât expect anything âwifelyâ out of her if they do end up married. Morgana just smiles and nods, shrugs like this doesnât particularly bother her.Â
This is too far. And so he tests her.Â
âWhere do you keep his ring, now?âÂ
She blinks and looks at him. âWhat?âÂ
âHis Ring. Lancelotâs ring. Where do you keep it?âÂ
She looks at him blankly, blinks a few times, and then shrugs. âI forget.âÂ
I forget. A woman so distraught at the loss of her love that sheâd been willing to leave behind everything she knew with no money and only the dress on her back, but sheâd forgotten the last thing that sheâd received from him? This was why she felt better after the potion was drunk, he was sure of it now. Sheâd been made to forget the things that caused her pain.
But still sheâd refused to marry. The love ran deep for her. Arthur wouldnât pretend to understand it, but he respected it none the less.Â
âIt was that damn physician who did this to you.â Arthur muttered, but Morgana was unaffected, distracted by the buzzing of a few nearby bees, smiling.Â
He wonders if this was what Morgana was like with him, this Lancelot fellow sheâs so lost without. He hopes she was. That he brought her joy with whatever time they had together.Â
Arthur has a physician to see, so he ends their ride early, despite Morganaâs protests.Â
George is glad to be heading back, at least.Â
â
As soon as they return, Arthur storms the court physicians quarters and confronts Merlin about what heâs done to Morgana. Merlin holds firm that heâs done nothing magical, and has only given a sick girl medicine to make her better.
âHow is it better to forget your love?âÂ
âShe was dying for him, Arthur. Doesnât your friend deserve a chance to live her life, free of pain?â
âLife is full of pain. You canât simply get rid of it. What sort of heartless bastard are you?âÂ
Merlinâs eyes flash with anger and maybe something else, but before Arthur can get a good look at it, Gwen, his assistant, takes Merlin by the elbow and reminds him they have a pressing appointment with an expectant mother in the lower town.Â
Arthur lets them go, but he doesnât forget that interaction.Â
â
For a year he courts Morgana, and finally, at Yule, he makes a public proposal. She accepts, as she had agreed she would weeks before, and the Yule celebration becomes a celebration of their engagement. Their wedding is set for Samhain of the next year. The wedding of the crown Prince and the Kingâs only son is going to be a giant affair, the whole of Camelot will rejoice in it.Â
At least, thatâs what everyone keeps telling him. Morgana seems content enough to marry him, though he canât help feeling distraught where this marriage is concerned. Morgana isnât in her right mind without her memories of Lancelot completely intact, or blocked off, or dimmed, or whatever it is that damn sorcerer has done to her.Â
So, finally, Arthur goes to Merlin and demands he lift the spell on Morgana.
âMy Lord, I havenât cast a spell on her. I gave her medicine. Medicine that saved her life, might I remind you. Even if I could simply reverse itâs effects, which I canât, she would only be right back where she was when I gave it to her, wasting away with mind sickness.â Merlinâs face, when he says this, shows no remorse, not a hint of anything resembling pity. He just looks⊠blank.Â
Arthur hadnât wanted to hear this. He grit his teeth and closed his eyes, trying to collect himself. âWhat exactly did your medicine do?âÂ
âIt blocked some of her ability to feel emotional pain. She still has all her memories, if thatâs what youâre worried about. She simply doesnât hurt when she thinks of them.âÂ
âYou say that like itâs not a terrible thing.âÂ
âIâm a physician. My whole life is dedicated to easing peopleâs sufferings.âÂ
Arthur is very glad Gwen isnât here. Heâd feel terrible starting a fight in front of a woman.Â
Arthur clocks Merlin in the mouth for the blasĂ© way that he talks about taking Morganaâs feelings from her. âI want you out of this castle. Weâll find a new court physician. Whatever your remedies are, I donât want them for my people.âÂ
Merlin glared but didnât say anything back. Arthur stormed out of the room and only once he was down the hall did the commotion start in the physicians quarters.Â
Arthur felt satisfied, then, that at least heâd gotten a rise out of the man.Â
â
Uther gives him grief about firing the court physician, but when Arthur stands his ground and says he doesnât like the way the man behaves, Uther simply nods and agrees to send the man, and his assistant packing.Â
He hadnât held out much hope for the possibility that Morgana would return to her old self when the man was gone, but when three days passed and Morgana still seemed unbothered, mood entirely unchanged, Arthurâs last little bit of hope died.
He promised himself that he would do right by her, then, and committed himself to honoring the memory of her love. Heâd make sure to remind her regularly, even use the ring Lancelot had given her as her wedding ring, if she wasnât opposed to the idea.Â
â
Their engagement goes well, and Morgana throws herself into the wedding preparations. She seems to be enjoying herself, and Arthur is glad of that, at least. They eventually find a new court physician, a wisened old man named Gaius. Arthur takes his suspicions about Morgana to the man, but he claims he can do nothing for it. Even so, something about the look on his face makes Arthur suspicious.Â
He sits down to breakfast with Morgana in his chambers, and while his manservant is attending to business on the other side of the room, he takes her hand in his to get her attention.
Morgana looks away from her breakfast and smiles easily at him. He would be a liar if he said he wasnât glad Morgana smiled more now than she had years ago, but something about it always felt wrong. Knowing she was being forced to suppress the memories of her dead love made that feeling of wrongness infinitely greater.
âIâve said this before,â He started, and she raised an eyebrow, curious, but without any bite. He used to quite like that she was always subtly making fun of him. âBut I feel the need to say it again, with the wedding just a few weeks away. Morgana, I will not expect anything of you in this marriage. I do care for you, but I donât love you anymore than you love me. You will be an excellent queen, and Iâm grateful to have you by my side, but this is a marriage of friends, and equals.â Despite our differences in stations goes unsaid, but not unheard.
Morganaâs smile becomes softer. âI know you donât. I wouldnât be marrying you if you did. I-â She stopped, trailed off, really, blinking like she was blinking away some thought she couldnât be bothered to remember. âThe preparations are going splendidly, anyway. It will be a beautiful ceremony. Unfortunately large, but it canât be helped. We canât refuse anyone an invitation.âÂ
The way her mind changes track from the aftermath of the marriage to the wedding itself worries him, and he thinks that he shouldâve pushed harder for a cure of some kind. But he dared not do anything that might alert Uther that he suspected an enchantment was placed on Morgana. Utherâs intolerance for magic had extended to those under its influence before, and he wouldnât risk Morganaâs life like that.
âNo, I suppose not. Any friends youâre looking forward to seeing?âÂ
Morgana laughed, âOther noble ladies have never liked me much, I ruffle their feathers.â She pulled her hand away from his and went back to her breakfast, but Arthur was not quite done.
âI want you to use Lancelotâs ring, as a tribute to him.â He watches her carefully when her body stills, eyes distant as she looked down at the fruit sheâd just speared with her fork. Again, she blinks away a thought and smiles.Â
âI donât know where it is.â She smiles, but itâs tight. âI havenât even thought of it in years.âÂ
âWould you like me to help you look for it? It might be nice to have.â Even if she says no, he thinks heâll try to convince her to find it. Maybe whatever connection it gives her will help bring her back from whatever spell Merlin put on her.
âMaybe,â She says it like she canât be bothered either way. He swallows and nods.
âLetâs look for it. You used to love it so much. Iâd like you to wear it again, once weâre married.âÂ
âThe wedding is in just a few weeks, and I havenât seen that ring in years. Do you really think weâll find it in time?â One of her eyebrows raises, a question, and maybe a challenge.
âHow hard can it be? Itâs probably in with the rest of your jewelry.â
Morgana laughed wholeheartedly now, still delicate enough for a lady, but very obviously laughing at him.
âWhat?â He asked, and she just shook her head.
âI donât think you realize how much jewelry youâve given me over that last two years. Your courting gifts are very unoriginal.âÂ
â
Sure enough, her vanity and another separate chest are both full of Jewelry. She goes through her vanity while Arthur checks the chest, but neither of them find it. Morgana gives him a knowing sort of âdidnât I tell youâ look, but Arthur is determined. Morgana is his friend and that ring is important to her, whether she remembers it or not. He will not see it lost forever to time and a terrible curse.Â
âAlright, fine. So itâs not with your jewelry. Check the pockets of your dresses, then. Iâll look under the bed.âÂ
Morgana laughed at him again. âYou really think Iâd find it in a pocket after all these years? Surely a laundrywoman would have taken it out and put it with my things.âÂ
He leveled her with a gaze that brokered no arguments. âHumor me.âÂ
She rolled her eyes at him, and at least this teasing felt a bit like the Morgana heâd known for a short while before sheâd been influenced.Â
Arthur got to his hands and knees, then down to his stomach, to look beneath every piece of furniture in the room. The bed, the night stands, the wardrobe. He even looked behind her changing screen and under the empty tub, but there was no ring in sight.Â
The rustling of fabric at the wardrobe stops and Arthur looks around the privacy screen to see Morgana, standing frozen at the door, head bent, eyes locked on something Arthur canât see.
He gets up and approaches her quietly, trying not to startle her.Â
âMorgana?â He asks when heâs still a few feet away, trying to see around the wardrobe doors to what sheâs holding, but his vantage point is no good. He moves to stand behind her, looking over her shoulder.Â
In her pale, shaking hand, lies a dull, tarnished ring. The band is far too wide to be fitting of a noble lady, let alone a queen, and the stone doesnât glitter so much as gently diffuse light. Heâs seen it only a few times before, after his father banned her from wearing it, but he thinks this must be it.
âI found it.â When she whispers it, her voice is choking. He gently turns her toward him and there are tears in her eyes. When she looks up at him, he sees every ounce of pain he remembers from their first meeting, and maybe more, laced with years of regret. âI canât marry you.âÂ
Arthur nods, feeling tears prick his own eyes as he pulls her into a hug. âWeâll figure something out.â He promises, and she sobs into his shoulder, soaking his shirt through. He pats her on the back and swears that he wonât force her to be married to him. Not on his life.Â
He explains his suspicions of Merlin to her, and when she goes to bed that night, sheâs distraught. The next morning she goes for her daily ride without him, presumably to think, and she never returns.Â
7 notes
·
View notes
Text
Mr. Queen Analysis
My take on the rather heartbreaking and vague ending of the KDrama, Mr. Queen.
 Okay, Iâve been thinking long and hard on this subject (way too much) and have come to the following consensus:
Bong-Hwan and So Yong are both versions of the same soul. What got me thinking about this was that scene in episode 5 where SoBong talks about original and past lives but then mentions parallel time-streams. To illustrate, she draws two lines running side by side and explains how a past life can be in one and the original/current being in the other. This had me stumped a bit, and I thought it a bit random that they put that in there, but then I looked up âreincarnation and parallel livesâ and thereâs a surprising number of articles on it - though obviously not conclusive or scientific as it involves spirituality.Â
Episode 5 also explains why time in the present is flowing at the same rate as the past, which we discovered when BHâs consciousness briefly reentered his body and explain why they chose to reveal that fact. Time isnât linear here but more fluid with both versions existing simultaneously - harkening back to the two lines Mr. Queen drew to illustrate.
The reincarnation theory would explain many of the elements of the story that I found hard to accept. For example:
If So Yongâs separate soul was in there with Bong Hwanâs soul then why did he never feel her? In fact, the show repeatedly makes reference to the idea that Bong Hwan does not feel another soul and attributes characteristics of SY to the body (telling her after the kiss that the soul is in control of the body so she ought to behave and in another scene he tries to get her soul to return by addressing the lake - where he believes she is hiding). The only time he accuses her of being a separate entity inside of him is when he wants an excuse for his feelings and reactions to CJ. The âit must have been her that took control. If I knew it was CJ I would have....still enjoyed it?!? Whatâs wrong with me?â moments. LOL What if the reason he couldnât feel another presence was because there wasnât another? He merely had his consciousness wake up in the body of his past life but didnât realize it.
It would explain the gradual integration of both personalities. For example, when CJ returns the book to Mr. Queen, she never thinks of herself as NOT being the girl from the well as she did when he first confesses his love for her at the lake. As BH spends more time in her previous body, the lines become more blurred not just in memory but also in identity because he IS her. If they were two separate souls, I donât think she would have that same reaction nor do I see anything to indicate that So Yong âtook overâ in that moment or any other. Memories were accessed, personality traits were mingling, but we saw SY come out in episode 20...that personality was immediately recognizable. Fantastic acting by SHS - especially as she had me loving the one and hating the other, despite being both.
It would explain why Mr. Queen falls for CJ so hard, despite his initial protests. I never liked the idea of his feelings being manipulated, but I can get on board with the idea that he accepts his feelings for CJ because this is a man that some part of him has always loved - and falls in love with âagainâ through their shared experiences and journey.
It would also explain the question of why Bong Hwan. What was the connection between this man and So Yong? They are reincarnations of each other. When So Yong was feeling hopeless and needed strength, she pulled upon her stronger version of herself to help her - made possible in that moment when she desperately wanted to give up on life and he desperately wanted to live. She came to him in that pool and appeared to the queen again when she was looking for answers in the lake. This does not give the impression of a soul cruelly imprisoned in her own body against her will.Â
It would also explain why, when Bong Hwan briefly went back to his body, So Yong did not reappear. She wasnât being suppressed. She purposefully had her reincarnated self come to give her strength and was not ready at that time to assume her life again. I found her choice of words at Byeong-Inâs grave to to be telling. She said he always knew where to find her whenever she was hiding. Itâs also why I believe BI didnât realize Mr. Queen wasnât SY - for the same reason CJ doesnât at the end of the drama. These two men, both of whom deeply love her, could sense it was her, just in reverse order. CJ-SB-SY and BI-SY-SB.
It would also solve the pesky issue of why BH is an overall better person - not just at the moment of his return but before. Someone on Reddit mentioned the implausibility of CJâs political accomplishments causing a ripple effect to change BH, and I agree. However, if we look at BH as SYâs reincarnation, then the positive attributes he now displays in the altered timeline can be accounted for because he prevented his previous incarnation from killing herself, therefore in his next lifetime his soul didnât carry those grudges. This fits with the idea of reincarnation as a personâs life experiences and emotions/grudges/regrets/mindset at death will determine the psychological and even physical manifestation of their next life.Â
SY was told by evil Kim that she had no power b/c she was a woman - next life is a man.Â
SY had her love cruelly rejected - next life is a playboy who doesnât seem to believe in love.Â
SY felt that she was living a lie - next life is a man who doesnât care who he offends with his opinion and does what he wants when he wants - to the point of selfishness - though this changes when he prevents many of these resentments by his actions in the past.Â
Finally, it would explain why CJ is so âobliviousâ at end of the show. He promised when he returned the book to SB that he would never fail to recognize her, and he doesnât. While her personality has changed, itâs intrinsically also the same person, though this is the area I felt the writers dropped the ball in execution, but I get that they were pressed for time. The implications of this aspect also seem to be what KJH meant in his comment to a fanâs question of whether the king knew that BH had left.That it didnât matter: SY or BH didnât matter, only how CJ saw her.
So why send BH back? I believe they did it because it wouldn't make sense for him to live a life he essentially already lived as SY. Reincarnation is meant to be for a soul to grow and spiritually evolve, which it could not do by simply repeating what it had already done. Also, for some reason (I suspect so as not to offend Koreans by skipping over one of the most prominent historical figures in their culture - Queen Min), they still have CJ dying at age 32. This can be seen in the book BH is looking at when he's seeing his portrait, and is mentioned as early as episode 1. This was never going to be a happy ending for CJ/BH in the sense that many viewers wanted. Rather, he was going to facilitate the relationship of SY/CJ so that his previous life could run its course...ugh, I feel sick typing that out...with the hope that they meet again in another lifetime. Our SB is many things but trapped in Joseon without modern medicine, a miracle worker she is not. CJ dies without any heirs; his baby with the queen dies at just six months. If the BH decided to stay for love and then lost the baby and CJ, that would be just as heartbreaking for me as the ending I received.Â
Wiki and other sources speculate the CJ was poisoned by the Andong Kims, but many historians (including Bong Hwanâs mother, it seems) dispute that fact as it would serve no purpose since he was a puppet king and since his death then allowed the Jo family to briefly take control until King Gojongâs father pretty much crushed both the Kims and the Jos. In reality, he probably died of unhealthy habits and a life of excess. In the showâs world, who knows...cancer or any number of possible illnesses that could not be treated at that time. During the banquet planning, we see CJ suffer a nosebleed. In the spinoff, Mr. Queen mentions how CJ is trying hard not to collapse from the strain of his burdens. These could be hints left by writers to indicate that CJâs health has been compromised by the grueling struggles and stress heâs had to endure, not to mention allowing himself to get blown up.
![Tumblr media](https://64.media.tumblr.com/cb2f439bd50ff5513f011e9d55549e37/9caa917e71eb6a89-28/s540x810/cca962b4bffb71b9eb2c8f350bf11ad7144f6a78.jpg)
They writers did give us the hope for another reunion - perhaps in BHâs lifetime or perhaps another one. Itâs why I think they tried to imply a SY/CJ connection in the Bamboo Forest prequel (the only prequel in the spinoff) as well as end Bamboo Forest with a reincarnation wish. The setup seemed quite intentional and in specific order. The prequel created a sense of destiny. The next segment was about Mr. Queen confirming if it was just his body or his soul that was attracted to CJ...literally the words out of the characterâs mouth...and they gave an answer to that with the last shot. The final segment introduced the wish for CJ to meet his queen again, and he is clearly thinking of Mr. Queen - so why the prequel, which would seem to introduce a separate love interest, unless itâs actually not because theyâre one and the same with the middle segment emphasizing the genuine attraction and love for each other.
This might not be everyoneâs cup of tea; it certainly wasnât mine, and I think the writers should have handled the leaving better instead of going for an quasi mind-wipe of all the charactersâ remembrances of Mr. Queen. I mean, CJ went from being horrified at Mr. Queen acting like a perfect little queen for a few seconds a mere handful of episodes ago to just asking "why the formality" at a more permanent display of temperament and seemed practically oblivious otherwise. Then Choi and Yeon were "shocked" when So Yong didn't revert to her witch of the palace act and chastise the maids that were laughing by the pond - as if Mr. Queen didn't already change that way of thinking months ago. Not to mention that they were also nonplussed by the fact that their relationship to the queen had gone from being regarded as family back to a servant/master status quo. Even with the soulmate angle, there was to much deus ex machina thrown in. The idea of soul mates is a romantic one, but the execution of it fell through.
They should have never gone with the reincarnation route, especially if they were never intending to let SY have a true voice in the drama, even if itâs just a final conversation between herself and BH before he leaves, made possible in that split second before true separation. Viewers never got to bond with her, and in those moments we did see her, she was either a watered down version of the personality we were emotionally invested in or emphasized the opposite characteristics (demure, feminine, etc...) that we loved Mr. Queen for rejecting. Also, this angle gives us no true feeling of completeness and satisfaction. SY is with CJ in the past - we won't see them develop their feelings for each other and grow to like them as a couple. BH is in the present but who knows if he'll find CJ's reborn soul and happiness with whoever it is. Promises without fulfillment demand too much from the audience to fill in the blanks. If that's the case, next time just give us a tag line and tell the audience to imagine the rest.
Even if they share the same soul, we are given two distinct personalities and not enough connection between them in terms of their recognizing each other, acknowledging their feelings for CJ to each other in some sort of passing the flame moment that would make it feel more homogeneous and prevent feelings of resentment at what we perceive as an injustice to a personality we adore.
Instead of creating an emotional divide between the two, they should have just have SY die before BH's soul enters, and develop the romance between CJ and HB's as the novel and even that cheap and campy Chinese version did. Having SY there just muddied the waters, and became a distraction and an excuse for every emotional milestone Mr. Queen experienced, negating that character's development and laying it at SY's feet or claims of deliberate interference.
They should have chosen a fictional king and not boxed themselves into a limited outcome. Granted, it gave them a valid reason for booting BH back to present times, but look at the result: limited number of years with someone the audience isn't really familiar with for our beloved ML (plus their baby dies) and a huge question mark for our F-turned back into ML in the present with the hope that maybe the reincarnation thing works in his favor but who knows because they couldn't even toss us that small crumb which would have alleviated some of our heartache for BH as well as give more credence to the fact that SY/BH are the same and thereby lessened the feelings of resentment to the SY character as well. Or they could have gone with a multiverse theory and left it wide open as to what sweeping changes would occur. BH being initially thrown back to the Joseon era as a result of his dying would have achieved that because then the audience would have no reason to revisit the present nor see that the worlds were linked via changes upon his return and stuck with the poisoning threat averted. Blow recorded history to smithereens and leave that to our imagination instead.
Yes, the fish-out-of-water hijinks were great fun, but the completion of the character arcs/relationship/etc...shouldnât be an afterthought.Â
The other element I would have liked to have seen that was in neither of the televised versions (though the Chinese one came very, very close) but was in the web novel is the king fully accepting that his wife is not the woman she was, believing that her previous body was a man, falling in love regardless and she with him. However, I think we all knew that wasnât going to happen in a kdrama.Â
36 notes
·
View notes
Text
Just watched and read Tower of God
Aka Tower of Scandal
There is a so-called The Tower that can grant anything to anyone who ever set foot on its top. Among people climbing it is a girl who wishes to see the stars and a boy who has nothing but her.
When I saw the original author's name in the anime, I was like "Hm, cool but does it stand for anything tho?" When I found out, it's "Oh. No wonder they use the shortened version."
Imma make a general opinion here. See the reblog for Webtoon Season 2 and 3 as well as the deeper stuffs. (Although it's just gibberish in it)
The Webtoon is still ongoing, right now already hitting 3 seasons with 450+ episodes (chapters). Good lord that's a lot of chapters, and each of them is pretty long.Â
To put it in perspective, one chapter can fit 2 separate fights plus exposition, while usually 1 chapter of standard weekly manga has like 1 fight and side exposition. It took me a full week to read the webtoon and that already cut a lot of my sleep time.
One of the vivid experience reading the webtoon is the art improvement. Sure the earlier chapters are kinda amateurish, but overtime it gets better and even better. By the time it enters the later part of Season 2, every flashy fight scene is spectacular and the art style is solid A+.
The worldbuilding is amazing. The power system and lore of the world are explained really well and they are really interesting. The floors and sites that the cast visit have amazing visuals and stories. As for the tests, I can get by without actually reading the rules lmao. It's like a real adventure.
Lots and lots of characters. For Season 1 only, I love the dynamic between everyone in the batch, some friendly, some hostile, some mysterious. The ones that are really close are heartwarming. For Season 2 and 3, well let's say it gets rowdier and crazier.
Great character designs. Like, everyone looks different from various distinct races and with physical attributes. So many characters I'd like to draw. They also dress differently. Even their attires differ from arcs to arcs. Tower of Fashion, indeed.
I love the story about The Shoes in the King's Display Case. It really tells the problems with the Jahad princesses system and by extension the government of the tower. Itâs one of the first signs that being in the tower, on a high position at that, doesn't sound all that glorious anymore if you're more on the humane side. The narration right now starts with Anaak Jahad, but later this is constantly explored from various perspectives with various motives.
Also btw this is one of the few media that realistically shows what will happen if you fight in a pair of high heels.
Look, I went here just for the girl-with-dream and boy-with-only-her story. I just thought hey that's an interesting storyline. Like it'd be cute, romantic, and maybe will be angsty after a while. Who knew the whole thing would be played like that.
This is like a shounen manga, except that there are more complicated political thriller, power abuse, and humanity issues in it. Many protagonist traits, among other things, that usually are viewed as good in other comics are now being questioned and deconstructed so thoroughly and mercilessly.
A lot of people say Bam's boring but let's be real, he's basically a baby. He literally lives in an underground cave alone until Rachel comes along. He does know nothing except her. Watching him getting to know the world in the tower and meeting new friends - essentially learning about the world outside that cave - is really fun to me.
Get yo self a boy like Khun, who will lie, cheat, beg and bribe to make you well. Not to mention kill and die for. Your name has to be The 25th Bam tho.
What is it with local smug light-haired boys being really close with the shy brunette boys???? The funny thing is, the chummy, attached-right-off-the-bat, no-personal-space atmosphere between them is pretty much anime original, compared to the webtoon. Now imagine when the anime reaches the webtoon Season 2 and 3, where even I went "Dude. Holy. Shit."
Rak best boy. Everyone and their mother loves Rak.Â
Keep an eye on Shibisu. Yes, that joke character with a purple tracksuit. You won't regret it.Â
*prostrate in front of Yuri Jahad* YOUR MAJESTY!!!!!! The shits that she pulls in the entire series *chef kiss till I die*
Tbh I am confused which ones are the correct spelling of the characters' names?
Convoluted multi-layered plot twists drama: *exists* Someone somewhere: All according to keikaku.Â
I really went 5 episodes thinking that is just Khun's multicolor hair instead of his bandanna what the fuck.Â
Mr. Lero Ro I admire you and your sensible ass.
No I won't say anything about Season 2 and on from the Webtoon here because the whole thing is a giant spoiler. But just a very important heads up: David Hockney is mine.
I knew Kpop boyband Stray Kids exists but this is the first time I listen to their works. The OP and ED songs fucking rock. They feel modern yet at the same time kinda ethereal. That high pitch <33
Also I like the OSTs in that I don't actually have a favorite track, but every track is suited well with the scenes. Apparently the guy, Kevin Penkin, is also the one who composed for Made in Abyss. No wonder I got the same vibe.
The anime adds lots of extra scenes but also redacts a lot of the webtoon scenes and exposition. As far as this writing, I personally don't think it's a major problem.
Tl;Dr: I was looking for a cute boy-girl story how did it become like this.Â
278 notes
·
View notes
Text
Finding You (Part Fourteen of ??)
Hey everyone! I hope youâre all having a good New Year so far! I have a bit of an update after the chapter for yâall.
Edit: Oop! I forgot the link to Part One for any new people! My bad!
Tags (ily all!):Â @simpingforsatan @naimena @hachimochi @wrathandgreed @magi-minminxiii @rensphilia @a-dream-at-night @chloelikesobeyme @getbehindme-satan @theuglypugling @oofthelazyweeb @mammonismyfirstman (as always, if youâd like to be put on the tags list, juust let me know in a comment down below, or a DM)
Word Count: 1,961
TW: None? Iâm pretty sure?
Mc didnât know what she was expecting from the song Satanâs brothers pressured him to play, but a gorgeous melancholic love song was not it, though she should have guessed it was a love song from the title. She was entranced from the first couple notes, and the lyrics pulled her in further. They spoke of someone experiencing love for the first time, though they were afraid of their Love fading away and leaving them. She smiled at the cat lyrics, finding herself not surprised Satan would write about them. He seemed like a cat lover, though she had no real basis for the belief.
 Satanâs singing voice was just as nice as his speaking voice and she found herself impressed. It also held a lot of emotion, enough that she was surprised it didnât affect his singing. Though she had never heard the song before, it seemed extremely familiar. Though, it was a fairly universal concept, so it probably just seemed sheâd heard it before. She hadnât realized she was crying until Mammon offered her a handkerchief. When he finished, everyone clapped, and he started on another song.
âI never thought Iâd hear thaâ song again,â Mammon spoke to Mc in a low voice.
âWhy?â she asked.
âOh⊠Uhhh⊠Well, itâs about a lost love of his. Once she⊠disappeared⊠He played it one more time and then said heâd never play it again.âÂ
Mc felt her throat constrict a bit at the revelation, âHe must be doing better then. When he got his next⊠lover, he probably started feeling better.â
âHe⊠Uhhh... '' Mammon floundered for words, and Mc found herself eagerly awaiting his next words, âI donâ think heâs dated anyone before or since her. If nothinâ else, she is his firsâ and only love.â
âDid she hurt him?â
âHuh?â
âI just ask because Iâve seen a lot of people, well, humans, who had relationships go sour and closed themselves off emotionally. I was just wondering if thatâs what happened to him.â
âNot⊠Not exactly⊠She was human and she⊠diedâŠâ Mammon seemed really anxious at this point, and Mc decided not to push the subject further.
A human? Really? Well, that adds another layer to the song. Itâs the most permanent level of âleaveâ there is. He knew going into the relationship it would end. But⊠If she had been corrupted enough by him, wouldnât she have gone to the Devildom? Then they couldâve been together⊠Does that mean she went to the Celestial Realm? Do I know her? Or⊠Did she get stuck as a wanderer? Either way, why would he play it now? Mammon said heâd sworn off playing it ever again⊠The questions swirled around in her head as she watched Satan play.
âOoooo! Ooooo! My turn!â
âAsmo, you canât play piano,â Satan sighed, already getting up.
âBut I can play music off of my DDD now canât I?â Asmodeus said, waltzing up to what had become a stage.
As Asmo scrolled through what Mc could only assume was his list of songs, Satan came and stood next to her. Mammon even moved over so he could. Mc gave him a small smile and then turned her attention back to Asmodeus, who was gushing about the song heâd found to sing. She was still thinking about all the unanswered questions she had when she felt a breath next to her ear âWhat did you think?â
Mc almost jumped, but instead found herself glued to her chair, âOf the song? Or your singing?â
âHmmm⊠Both.â
âYou play and sing wonderfully. The song was beautiful. I could really feel your emotions.â
âThank you,â Mc felt Satan retreat back to a standing position, and she found she missed his presence.
A huff from the other side of the room caught her attention. Looking over, she caught the tailend of Michael watching Satan with narrowed eyes before turning back to Asmodeus. How strange.
When Asmodeus finished, Lucifer was both begged and forced to play by those in the room. While Mc had to admit he was definitely in a league all his own, she found herself preferring Satanâs playing to Luciferâs. She cocked her head slightly at the realization.
âExcellent Lucifer! Just exquisite!â Diavolo boomed, giving the Avatar of Pride a standing ovation, âI canât remember the last time I heard you play!â
âWell, it has been awhile,â Lucifer smiled. His pride seemed to have recovered enough he could properly interact with people again. Mc was happy she was able to avert a crisis, not interested in finding out how a brawl between Michael and Lucifer would go. Though⊠Would either of them actually get into a physical altercation?...
Mc was so caught up in her thoughts, she didnât realize the brothers were leaving until they were all asking if she would come to the House of Lamentation at some point.
â... And I would love to paint your nails,â Asmo prattled on, grabbing her hands, âAnd I know the Devildomâs lack of light can make your skin lose some of its radiance, but I have a moisturizer that can help with that. Oh and-â
âAsmo, come on! Ya want Mc to come visit or not?â Mammon interrupted,
âMammon, you donât understand the nuances of keeping yourself looking perfect.â
âUh, yes. I do. Iâm a model. Ya been smellinâ too many of ya fancy products and itâs melted ya brain?â
âI think youâre thinking of yourself, though it was probably when you were trying to con those witches into buying acid, and you drank some.â
âOi! How do ya know about that?â
âUgh, there they go again,â a head rested itself on Mcâs shoulder, and she almost jumped until she saw who it was, âSeriously though Mc. You should come over.â
âYeah. Youâre even welcome to bring Luke,â the one brother who she hadnât talked to added, âBarbatos told me heâs gotten even better at baking.â
âOf course Iâve gotten better at baking! Iâm also very good at cooking too,â Luke said, having joined the conversation.
Mc watched at Beelzebub, which is who she figured he must be through the process of elimination, actually started drooling, âDoes that mean youâre actually going to come over then?â
Luke smiled fondly, a look Mc wasnât sure sheâd have ever thought he could have for a demon, âIf youâd like Beel, I could probably make that happen.â
Beel rushed over to Luke and pulled him into a huge hug. Belphegor removed himself from Mc, walking over to Beelzebub, âBeel, you need to let go of the chihuahua or heâs going to suffocate. Luke canât make you food if heâs been squished.â
âIâm sorry. I hope these idiots havenât been bothering you too much.â
âNot at all Lucifer. They were just inviting me over sometime.â
âWell, I suppose itâs time for us to head out,â Lucifer said, starting to gather his brothers.
âYou are welcome anytime you want to come over,â Satanâs voice came from behind her.
âI⊠Thanks. I would really like that.â
âSatan! Weâre leaving.â
âIâm coming Lucifer,â Satan called, rolling his eyes, then back to Mc with a smile, âBye.â
âBye,â Mc called after him.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Mc sat in her room hours later, the events of the evening still running through her head. Though she knew Michael wouldnât approve, she found herself much more at ease and even happier around them than she did around most angels. There was a non-judgmental kindness they all exuded (well, all except Lucifer) that made her feel like she belonged. She found herself excited about the prospect of spending more time with them at the House of Lamentation. She had to laugh a bit, the fact she didnât fit in with the rest of the angels never more clear than it was now.Â
Simeon had told her his time in the Devildom had been extremely enjoyable, the less structured lifestyles if the Devildom a welcome change from the Celestial Realm. She had read his work from that time and it was obvious he had felt a lot more creative in the Devildom, even though he had school responsibilities at the time. While she hadnât doubted his words, she had always figured the change was mostly due to the fact he had been able to communicate with his lost brothers again. Now she understood what he had been talking about.Â
Simeon generally gets along with the other angels too. What would they all say if they found out I prefer the company of the Fallen to them? Everything is just more natural with them. Itâs almost like I already know who they are, as strange as that sounds. Especially Satan, though Iâve felt connected to him since I got his letter. Speaking of which, who was it that he mentioned? Lil⊠Lilly? Lillah? Lillian? Hmmm⊠I canât remember. I do know Iâve never heard that name before. Whoever it was seemed to have a great impact on all of the brothers. It canât be someone they Fell with. Iâve read all the literature about the Fall and I donât recognize the name. Though thereâs a lot about the Fall the Celestial Realm doesnât talk about. But... Simeonâs also never mentioned anyone with that name before⊠Maybe itâs time for me to do some more research.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Mc stretched, and checked the time on her DDD. She had been in Diavoloâs personal library for over three hours, and she still hadnât found any mention of the mysterious âLâ person. She found plenty of references to Lucifer though. It seemed he and his brothers had been instrumental in helping Diavolo establish order when the old King had started his slumber. What caused this slumber, why it happened, or if it would end was not covered. Mc wanted to research the topic further, but she couldnât get distracted until she had answered her initial question.
There was a knock at the door, and Barbatos came in carrying a teacup on a saucer, âI thought you might be in here.â
âOh, hello Barbatos.â
The butler entered the room, and set the tea down on the table Mc was studying at, âI thought you might like some tea.â
âI would actually, thank you. If you would like to, you can take a seat.â
âI suppose thatâd be alright,â Barbatos smiled, and sat down in a chair. His eyes glided across the books strewn around Mc, âYouâve got some heavy reading here.â
âWell, Iâm trying to figure something out,â Mc sighed, sipping her tea.
âPerhaps I can be of assistance?â
âMaybe, though I donât remember what it is Iâm looking for exactly,â Barbatos simply cocked his head slightly until she continued, âSatan was telling about⊠Well, a personal experience, and he mentioned someone. I donât remember their name, but it was someone very close to all the brothers and they had passed away. I was just trying to figure out who it was.â
âYou seem very interested in this person,â Barbatosâ tone wasnât accusatory, but he seemed to expect and answer.
â... I guess Iâm just trying to understand them better. Him better,â The last part slipped from Mcâs mouth easily, surprising even her.
âI think I may know who youâre talking about. If Iâm correct, you wonât find any references to her in these books. Itâs not my place to explain the situation to you however. You should probably go speak with the brothers about herâŠâ the butler paused for a second before continuing, âI believe Michael also knows a lot about the situation, though he doesnât know the full story,â with that, he got up and pushed his chair in, âI must continue with my duties, but I appreciate the short reprieve. Good night.â
âNight,â Mc called after him. Huh. Michael knows?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Part Fifteen
 I wanted to let you all know that as it is January, ever since 2014 the first moth of the year has been terrible for me. So far, we are 3 days into 2021, and I have already gotten a near constant tooth ache meaning Iâm going to have to go to the dentist, and have gotten sick. I donât know what else this month has in store for me, but I just wanted to warn you all, if my updates get sporadic or short, thatâs why đŹÂ
#OBEY ME#obey me!#obey me! swd#obey me satan#obey me satan/mc#obey me barbatos#obey me brothers#obey me! shall we date?#obey me mc#obey me long fic#obey me michael#obey me lilith#Finding You#my writing#aspenflower17
33 notes
·
View notes